312401b K Chief 500 Operator Manual AMS PCS PMS

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management Operator Manual

312401/B March 2009

Document history Document number: 312401 Rev. A

June 2007

First edition in Teamcenter. Replaces AD-00534. No changes to contents.

Rev. B

March 2009

Major revision. Refer to P&I BKJ01-2007/1530.

The reader

This Operator Manual describes how to use the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management controls and display facilities. It is intended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of alarm and monitoring systems and have basic knowledge of personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime training course.

Note The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of Kongsberg Maritime AS. Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.

Warning The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel. The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate or work on the equipment. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.

Comments

To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and constructive criticism. e-mail: [email protected]

Kongsberg Maritime AS Bekkajordet P.O.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, Norway

Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.kongsberg.com

Operator Manual

Table of contents Admonitions ........................................................................................................... 11 Glossary..................................................................................................................12 Alarm list terms ......................................................................................................14 1 1.1 1.2

INTRODUCTION .............................................................. 15 Purpose ...................................................................................................................15 Safety rules .............................................................................................................17

2 2.1 2.2 2.3

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.................................................... 18 System overview ....................................................................................................18 K-Chief 500 system diagrams ................................................................................20 Design principles ....................................................................................................22 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3

2.4

Alarm system..........................................................................................................27 2.4.1

2.5

Stand-by pumps.......................................................................................... 41 Valve control ............................................................................................. 42 PID controllers .......................................................................................... 43 Compressor control .................................................................................... 43 Purifier control ........................................................................................... 43 Boiler control ............................................................................................ 44

System functions, Power Management System .....................................................45 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3

3 3.1

About the Bridge Watch Monitoring System................................................. 40 About bridge watch alarms .......................................................................... 40

System functions, Process Control System ............................................................41 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6

2.8

Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring.................................................. 30 Trend monitoring ........................................................................................ 30 Fuel performance system (optional) ............................................................. 30 Running hours and counters......................................................................... 31 Tank display ............................................................................................... 32 Engine monitoring ...................................................................................... 34

System functions, Bridge Watch Monitoring System ............................................40 2.6.1 2.6.2

2.7

Alarms ....................................................................................................... 27

System functions, Alarm and Monitoring System .................................................30 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6

2.6

System components .................................................................................... 22 Decentralized system architecture ................................................................ 23 Centralized operation .................................................................................. 25

Introduction................................................................................................ 45 Generator control functions ........................................................................ 46 Power management functions with shaft generator ....................................... 47

UNIT DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................... 50 Overview ................................................................................................................50

312401/B

3

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

3.2

Operator Stations and Operator Panels ..................................................................51 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6

3.3

Watch Calling System ............................................................................................58 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4

3.4

Operator functions ...................................................................................... 77 Alarm and monitoring display ..................................................................... 77 Process mimics, bar graphs and status displays ............................................. 77 Logging and hard copy ............................................................................... 78 Self-checking and diagnostics...................................................................... 78 Access control ........................................................................................... 78

System images ........................................................................................................79 4.2.1 4.2.2

4

Gateway types ............................................................................................ 74 The System Gateway (SGW) ....................................................................... 74 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) .................................................... 75

USER INTERFACE ............................................................ 77 Overview ................................................................................................................77 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6

4.2

Main characteristics .................................................................................... 63 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) ................................................................ 64 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc).............................................................. 64 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a)...................................................... 65 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)............................................................... 66 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) ................................................................. 66 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) ................................................................... 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) ................................................................... 68 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) .................................................................... 69 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) ................................................ 70 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) ...................................................................... 71 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) ................................................... 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS).............................................................. 72 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) ............................................................ 73

Gateways ................................................................................................................74 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3

4 4.1

Purpose ...................................................................................................... 58 Watch Calling repeat alarm feature............................................................... 58 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) .......................................................................... 59 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) ........................................................................... 60

Distributed Processing Units ..................................................................................63 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 3.4.10 3.4.11 3.4.12 3.4.13 3.4.14

3.5

Operator Station (OS) ................................................................................. 51 Midi Operator Station (MOS) ...................................................................... 52 Control Room Panel (CRP) ......................................................................... 53 Input Panel (INP)........................................................................................ 54 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC)..................................................................... 55 Touch Control Panel (TCP) ......................................................................... 56

Display layout ............................................................................................ 79 Image types in the main window.................................................................. 79

312401/B

Operator Manual

4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10

Process image............................................................................................. 80 List image .................................................................................................. 80 Trend image ............................................................................................... 82 Monitoring image ....................................................................................... 83 System configuration image......................................................................... 84 PDF viewer ............................................................................................... 85 Navigator ................................................................................................... 86 How processes are displayed and controlled ................................................. 87

4.3

ShipViewer .............................................................................................................89

5 5.1 5.2

GETTING STARTED.......................................................... 90 Operator stations and panels...................................................................................90 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) ...................................................................91 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8

5.3

Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP)....................................................................95 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3

5.4

Understanding the ALC............................................................................... 97 ALARM group buttons and lamps ............................................................... 97 PANEL group lamps ................................................................................... 98 COMMAND group buttons and lamps ......................................................... 98 Background light ........................................................................................ 98 Buzzer ....................................................................................................... 98 Temperature sensor ..................................................................................... 99

Using the Input Panel (INP) .................................................................................100 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5

5.6

Understanding the TCP ............................................................................... 95 Alarm Navigator......................................................................................... 95 Graphic Display Navigator .......................................................................... 96

Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) ..............................................................97 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7

5.5

Understanding the CRP ............................................................................... 91 ALARM group buttons and lamp ................................................................. 91 PANEL group lamps ................................................................................... 92 COMMAND group buttons and lamps ......................................................... 92 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) ............................................................... 93 Trackball ................................................................................................... 94 Buzzer ....................................................................................................... 94 Temperature sensor ..................................................................................... 94

Understanding the INP .............................................................................. 100 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) ............................................................. 100 Trackball ................................................................................................. 101 Background light ...................................................................................... 102 Temperature sensor ................................................................................... 102

Using the Midi Operator Station ..........................................................................103 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3

312401/B

Range of use ............................................................................................ 103 Understanding the keyboard ...................................................................... 103 Understanding the display ......................................................................... 105

5


5.6.4

5.7

Using the Watch Bridge Unit ...............................................................................107 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4

5.8

6.1 6.2

Explanation of controls and indicators.........................................................110 How to respond to alarms ...........................................................................112 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels ..........................................113 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels...........................................113 How to test the panel..................................................................................113

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM......................................................................... 114 Overview .............................................................................................................. 114 OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP)....................... 115 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.2.17 6.2.18 6.2.19 6.2.20 6.2.21 6.2.22 6.2.23 6.2.24 6.2.25 6.2.26 6.2.27

6

Explanation of controls and indicators........................................................ 107 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels ......................................... 109 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels...........................................110 How to test the panel..................................................................................110

Using the Watch Cabin Unit................................................................................. 110 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5

6

Menus...................................................................................................... 106

How to handle alarm events........................................................................115 Navigator name definitions ........................................................................115 How alarms are printed after a black-out .....................................................116 How to acknowledge alarms .......................................................................116 How to display Alarm Summary .................................................................117 How to display alarm history ......................................................................119 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 120 How to display counters and reset counters................................................. 121 How to display offscan alarms ................................................................... 121 How to toggle between group and alarm display ......................................... 122 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions ....................................... 122 Screen Saver............................................................................................. 124 How to save screen dump .......................................................................... 125 How to customise the Favourites ............................................................... 126 How to print Miscellaneous Logs............................................................... 127 How to configure the Event Log ................................................................ 132 How to configure your own Selected Points group ...................................... 133 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group .......................... 134 How to configure the Autolog.................................................................... 135 How to configure the Noonlog ................................................................... 136 Where to find the Event Log display .......................................................... 137 How to display system information ............................................................ 137 Access control system ............................................................................... 138 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information ............................. 145 How to change time zone .......................................................................... 145 How to change system time ....................................................................... 146 Info field .................................................................................................. 147

312401/B

Operator Manual

6.2.28 6.2.29 6.2.30 6.2.31 6.2.32 6.2.33 6.2.34 6.2.35 6.2.36 6.2.37 6.2.38 6.2.39 6.2.40 6.2.41

6.3

How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms .................................... 147 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves ............................. 147 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer........................................... 148 How to change tag parameters for a channel ............................................... 148 How to change Deviation parameters ......................................................... 152 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration .......................................... 155 How to set the On Duty engineer ............................................................... 155 How to select the Watch Responsible location ............................................ 156 How to call officers................................................................................... 157 How to change the engineer qualifications .................................................. 159 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode............................................... 159 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel .................................. 160 How to make your own short trend display ................................................ 162 How to make your own long trend display ................................................. 176

OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP).......................180 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13 6.3.14 6.3.15 6.3.16 6.3.17 6.3.18 6.3.19 6.3.20 6.3.21 6.3.22 6.3.23 6.3.24 6.3.25 6.3.26 6.3.27 6.3.28

312401/B

How to lock and unlock the Touch Control Panel ........................................ 180 How to display Alarm Summary ................................................................ 182 How to display alarm history ..................................................................... 183 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 184 How to display counters and reset counters................................................. 184 How to display offscan alarms ................................................................... 185 How to toggle between group and alarm display ......................................... 186 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions ....................................... 186 Screen saver ............................................................................................. 188 How to save screen dump .......................................................................... 189 How to customise the Favourites ............................................................... 190 How to print Miscellaneous Logs............................................................... 190 How to configure the Event Log ................................................................ 195 How to configure your own Selected Points group ...................................... 196 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group .......................... 197 How to configure the Autolog.................................................................... 199 How to configure the Noonlog ................................................................... 199 Where to find the Event Log display .......................................................... 200 How to display system information ............................................................ 200 Access control system ............................................................................... 201 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information ............................. 207 How to change time zone .......................................................................... 208 How to change system time ....................................................................... 209 Info field .................................................................................................. 210 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms .................................... 210 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves ............................. 210 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer............................................211 How to change tag parameters for a channel ................................................211

7


6.3.29 6.3.30 6.3.31 6.3.32 6.3.33 6.3.34 6.3.35 6.3.36 6.3.37 6.3.38

6.4

MOS operational procedures................................................................................242 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 6.4.9 6.4.10

6.5

7.1

8

Main ShipViewer functions ...................................................................... 255 Understanding the ShipViewer display ....................................................... 255 Explanation of ShipViewer displays ........................................................... 257 How to print displayed information............................................................ 260 How to save ShipViewer images ................................................................ 261 How to view saved mimic diagram files ..................................................... 261

ME monitoring operational procedures................................................................263 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3

7

How to receive a call................................................................................. 252 How to respond to alarms .......................................................................... 252 How to call the ON DUTY engineer .......................................................... 252 How to transfer watch responsibility .......................................................... 252 How to accept watch responsibility ............................................................ 253 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WBU) ........... 253 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WCU) ........... 253

ShipViewer operational procedures......................................................................255 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6

6.7

How to handle alarm events....................................................................... 242 How to display alarm history ..................................................................... 242 How to display alarm summary.................................................................. 243 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 243 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration ....................................... 244 About password access.............................................................................. 245 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details ...................... 246 How to change tag parameters .................................................................. 247 How to change alarm limits ....................................................................... 251 How to change alarm delay ....................................................................... 251

Watch Calling system operational procedures .....................................................252 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7

6.6

How to change Deviation parameters ......................................................... 215 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration .......................................... 218 How to set the On Duty engineer ............................................................... 218 How to select the Watch Responsible location ............................................ 218 How to call officers................................................................................... 219 How to change the engineer qualifications .................................................. 221 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode............................................... 221 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel .................................. 222 How to make your own short trend display ................................................ 224 How to make your own long trend display ................................................. 238

ME monitoring overview mimic ................................................................ 263 Bearing Wear............................................................................................ 263 Cylinder Liner – Fluctuating monitoring (scuffing) .................................... 271

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, BRIDGE WATCH MONITORING SYSTEM .................................................. 276 Overview ..............................................................................................................276

312401/B

Operator Manual

7.2

BWMS operational procedures ............................................................................276 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.8 7.2.9

8 8.1 8.2 8.3

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM......................................................................... 283 Overview ..............................................................................................................283 About the Process Control System .......................................................................283 OS operational procedures ...................................................................................283 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5

8.4

9.1 9.2 9.3

How to operate a pump starter ................................................................... 283 How to operate a fan starter ....................................................................... 295 How to operate a compressor..................................................................... 299 How to operate valves ............................................................................... 309 How to operate a PID controller................................................................. 313

MOS operational procedures................................................................................316 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6

9

Normal use of the BWMS ......................................................................... 276 How to turn the system on/off ................................................................... 277 How to select backup navigator on duty .................................................... 278 How to turn system’s auto mode on/off ...................................................... 278 How to call for backup ............................................................................. 279 How to adjust system timers ..................................................................... 279 How to change between day and night viewing........................................... 280 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration ....................................... 280 How to change access level ....................................................................... 281

How to open Tag overview ........................................................................ 317 How to operate a pump starter ................................................................... 317 How to operate a fan starter ....................................................................... 327 How to operate a compressor..................................................................... 330 How to operate a valve.............................................................................. 340 How to operate a PID controller................................................................. 344

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................................... 347 Overview ..............................................................................................................347 About the Power Management System ................................................................347 OS operational procedures ...................................................................................348 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8

312401/B

Overview ................................................................................................ 348 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP)........................................................................................................ 349 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the TCP)........................................................................................................ 349 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control ................................. 349 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control ............................ 357 How to operate a generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint ................................................................................................... 359 How to operate the main switchboard controller ......................................... 360 How to operate a bus-tie breaker ............................................................... 363

9


9.3.9

9.4

MOS operational procedures................................................................................366 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6

10 10.1 10.2 10.3

How to operate the one-touch auto sequence .............................................. 364 User interface ........................................................................................... 366 How to operate the main switchboard controller ......................................... 367 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control ................................. 370 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control ............................ 379 How to operate a generator set without start/stop, but with adjustable load setpoint .................................................................................................... 381 How to operate a bus-tie breaker ............................................................... 382

REFERENCE GUIDE........................................................ 385 Overview ..............................................................................................................385 Tag types...............................................................................................................386 Alarm and monitoring parameters........................................................................389 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7

Analogue input tag items........................................................................... 389 Counter input tag items ............................................................................. 393 Digital input tag items ............................................................................... 396 Exhaust mean value tag items .................................................................... 397 Exhaust deviation tag items ....................................................................... 400 Common sub-menu items .......................................................................... 401 Alarm sub-menu items .............................................................................. 402

10.4 Engineer’s safety ..................................................................................................403 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3 10.4.4 10.4.5

Purpose .................................................................................................... 403 Functions ................................................................................................. 403 Local control ............................................................................................ 403 Operator Station control ............................................................................ 403 Parameters ............................................................................................... 403

11 MAINTENANCE .............................................................. 405 11.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................405 11.2 Preventive maintenance........................................................................................406 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4

Maintenance schedule ............................................................................... 406 Weekly maintenance ................................................................................. 406 6–monthly maintenance ............................................................................ 407 Yearly maintenance................................................................................... 408

11.3 Corrective maintenance ........................................................................................409 11.4 Built In Self-Test (BIST) ......................................................................................410 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3

10

How to handle DPU error codes................................................................. 410 RIO-C3 7–segment display.........................................................................411 How to handle DPU communication errors................................................. 412

312401/B

Operator Manual

Admonitions The following admonitions found throughout this manual mark special messages to alert the user of specific information concerning of the personnel, the equipment or the process. WARNING Text set off in this manner provides a warning notice that failure to follow the directions in this WARNING can result in bodily harm or loss of life and/or extensive damage to equipment. Caution Text set off in this manner provides a warning notice that failure to follow the directions in this CAUTION can result in damage to equipment. Note

Text set off in this manner presents clarifying information or specific instructions pertinent to the immediate instruction.

312401/B

11


Glossary ACK ALC AMS BIST BWMS CAN CCR CRP DG dPSC DPU ER ECR EMC EMD EMI ESD GND GUI IACS ID IEC IMO INP I/O KM LAN LCD LED MCT MOS NC NO OD OS

12

Acknowledge Alarm & Control Panel Alarm and Monitoring System Built In System Test Bridge Watch Monitoring System Controller Area Network Cargo Control Room Control Room Panel Diesel Generator Dual Process Segment Controller Distributed Processing Unit Engine Room Engine Control Room Electromagnetic Compatibility European union Maritime Directorate Electromagnetic Immunity Electrostatic Discharge Ground (module 0 V reference) Graphic User Interface International Association of Class Societies Inner Diameter International Electrotechnical Commission International Maritime Organisation Input Panel Input/Output Kongsberg Maritime Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Multi-cable Transit System Midi Operator Station Normally Closed Normally Open Outer Diameter Operator Station

312401/B

Operator Manual

PCS

Process Control System

PDO

Process Data Object

PDS

Process Data Segment

PE

Protective Earth

PEC

Parallel Earthing Conductor

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller

PMS

Power Management System

PS

Process Station

PSO

Power Switch Over Module

PSS

Process Segment Starcoupler Module

RAi

Remote Analogue Input Device

RAi TC

Remote Analogue Input Device for Thermo Couple

RAo

Remote Analogue Output Device

RDi

Remote Digital Input Device

RDo

Remote Digital Output Device

RIO

Remote I/O

SG

Shaft Generator

STP

Shielded Twisted Pair

TCP

Touch Control Panel

UMS

Unmanned Machinery Space

UPS

Uninterruptible Power Supply

USB

Universal Serial Bus

UTC

Universal Time Coordinated

UTP

Unshielded Twisted Pair

VCC

Voltage Converter Controller

WBU

Watch Bridge Unit

WCU

Watch Cabin Unit

312401/B

13


Alarm list terms Analogue sensors Grad

Gradient alarm. The input signal is changing rapidly.

High

High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set limit.

Hi-Hi

High-High alarm. When the input signal is higher than a set limit.

IFH

Instrument failure high alarm. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA.

IFL

Instrument failure low alarm. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA.

Inhib

Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms, such as when the main engine is stopped.

Low

Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit.

Lo-Lo

Low-Low alarm. When the input signal is lower than a set limit.

Offsc

Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations and is not measured any more.

Digital sensors Broken

The wiring to the sensor has an open-circuit.

Closed

The switch is closed, such as “valve closed”.

Inhib

Inhibit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms, such as when the main engine is stopped.

Offsc

Offscan alarm. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations.

Open

The switch is open, such as “valve open”.

Short

The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit.

14

312401/B

Introduction

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Purpose The purpose of this Operator Manual is to present the information required to operate the Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. The purpose of this Operator Manual is to present the information required to operate the Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. The manual includes the following main chapters: • System description – This chapter presents a general introduction to the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. • Unit descriptions – This chapter presents a technical description of the K-Chief 500 system units. • User interface – This chapter presents all the elements of the user interface. • Getting started – This chapter explains how to use the basic control functions of the K-Chief 500 system. • Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Alarm and Monitoring System for all Operator Station types. • Operational procedures, Bridge Watch Monitoring System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Bridge Watch Monitoring System. • Operational procedures, Process Control System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Process Control System for all Operator Station types. • Operational procedures, Power Management System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Power Management System for all Operator Station types. • Reference guide – This chapter contains parameter-related information accessible from the various operator locations.

312401/B

15


• Maintenance – This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what to do if the system fails. Note

The K-Chief 500 is a modular system, consisting of standard main units as Operator Stations, Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. For a specific project configuration, the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class. Important

Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

16

312401/B

Introduction

1.2 Safety rules Note

Kongsberg Maritime’s health and safety system must be adhered to at all times. WARNING Fire If a fire condition arises, emission of toxic fumes can be anticipated from burning insulation, printed circuit boards and similar. WARNING Health hazards Do not inhale dust when cleaning the interior of the system. The dust is a temporary health hazard, depending on individual allergies. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment. Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liable to damage due to static voltages. Observe all precautions for handling of semiconductive sensitive devices.

312401/B

17


2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2.1 System overview The K-Chief 500 is an Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. Modular design allows flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements, covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced process control. Sub-systems can include all or any combination of the following: • Alarm and monitoring system • Auxiliary control system • Power management system • Cargo control system • Propulsion control • Ballast automation system • HVAC (air conditioning) • Anti-heeling • Reefer monitoring • Fire system • Main Engine monitoring system Note

This manual only describes the K-Chief 500 used as an Alarm and Monitoring System. Note

This manual describes the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime’s unified automation concept, where each individual ship configuration is built up using standard modules communicating on CAN and LAN networks. The K-Chief 500 is configurable for all ship types, including oil and gas tankers, bulk carriers, passenger vessels, container and Ro-Ro vessels, reefers and other special purpose vessels. The main purpose of the system is to give ship’s officers all the basic alarms and status information they require in order to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other relevant equipment.

18

312401/B

System description

K-Chief 500 complies with the requirements of IMO, local maritime authorities, IACS, and eleven classification societies. It is designed to meet the classification societies requirements for periodically unmanned engine room operation. The system conforms to all rules and regulations, and all modules are type approved. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardware and software technology. K-Chief 500 is also developed to strict military quality standards. Refer to Typical small K-Chief 500 system (oil tanker) on page 20 and Typical large K-Chief 500 system (gas tanker) on page 21 for a principal overview of the K-Chief 500 system. The K-Chief 500 system can be a stand-alone system, but it may also be interfaced with other systems. Examples of systems are shown in the list underneath. • K-Gauge – The K-Gauge is a cargo monitoring and control system which is a highly integrated system incorporating level gauging, temperature and pressure monitoring, valve and pump control. • K-log – The K-Log Electronic Logbooks are designed to replace the traditional paper logbooks. K-Log supports event based recording of data related to navigation, engine watch, port calls and other operational activities. • Auto Chief C20 – The Auto Chief C20 is a propulsion control system which can be adapted to various engines. • Main Engine monitoring system – The ME monitoring system monitoring the conditions of Main Engine; Bearing Wear alarm handling, Cylinder Liner temperature and detections of scuffing of piston wall, main bearing temperature, x-head bearing and crank bearing temperature, Torque measurements, Water In Oil Detection. The Main Engine monitoring is under constant development to meet the modern requirements of such a system. • FleetMaster – The FleetMaster enables continuous access to primary vessel data both on board the vessel and from ashore. • Voyage data recorder – The main purpose of our Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) the Maritime Black Box MBB® is to record and store relevant ship’s data and allow reconstruction of ship incidents at sea. • External VDR • Serial interface to external systems — for instance a fire system or a level gauging system.

312401/B

19


2.2 K-Chief 500 system diagrams Figure 1

Typical small K-Chief 500 system (oil tanker)

Accommodation

WCU

Wheelhouse

Engine Control Room

Printer

WBU WCU

WCU

OS

OS

WCU WCU WCU

OS

CRP 1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

WCU

Dual LAN Switch MSI12

Instrument driver

Serial line RS-422

DPU

CEG

CEG

Dual CAN

dPSC Serial gateway for propulsion control system

DPU

MOS

Rotating light and horn

MOS

MOS

dPSC

(vs060222f)

DPU

20

DPU

dPSC DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

8 DPU Cabinet

16 DPU Cabinet

DPU

DPU

DPU

16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC

PMS modules to be installed in MSB / ESB

Process Area

312401/B

System description

Figure 2

Typical large K-Chief 500 system (gas tanker)

Accommodation

Wheelhouse

WCU

Engine Control Room

Printer

WBU WCU

OS

WCU

Cargo Control Room

Printer OS

WCU

OS

OS

CRP

WCU

1 h9 p2 5

WCU

A u 1 2 t o

OS

OS

CRP 1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

1 h9 p2 5

A u 1 2 t o

WCU

Dual LAN Switch

Switch MSI12

MSI12

Instrument driver DPU

Serial line RS-422

Serial line RS-422

CEG

CEG

CEG

CEG

Dual CAN

Dual CAN

dPSC Serial gateway for propulsion control system

DPU

MOS



MOS

MOS

dPSC

dPSC

Routing of tags between Engine Room and Cargo segments

dPSC DPU

MOS

DPU

MOS

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

DPU

(vs060222i)

8 DPU Cabinet

312401/B

16 DPU Cabinet


DPU

PMS modules to be installed in MSB / ESB

dPSC

16 DPU Cabinet

Engine Room Process Area

DPU


Cargo Process Area

21


2.3 Design principles 2.3.1 System components The K-Chief 500 is a modular system that allows us to meet individual ship owner’s requirements using standard modules. The main building blocks of the K-Chief 500 are: • Operator Stations (OS) – Their main functions are to receive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of the system. They can display mimic diagrams, allow control of the Watch Calling System and print various logs. They also enable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units for inspection of variables, remote operation of equipment adjustment of parameters etc. • Midi Operator Stations (MOS) – Their main functions are to allows alarm indication, process control and power management. The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose Operator Station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. For small alarm systems it can be the only Operator Station. • Operator Panels (CRP/INP/ALC/TCP) – Their main functions are to act as status and command panels for the Operator Stations. They also include a keypad for entering number values into the system and/or a trackball for controlling cursor position on the Operator Station screen. • Watch Bridge Units (WBU) – Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control and to accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to and from the bridge. • Watch Cabin Units (WCU) – Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms in the engineer on duty’s cabin and in the public quarters while in bridge control. • Distributed Processing Units (DPU) – Their main functions are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available to meet specific control and monitoring applications.

22

312401/B

System description

• Dual redundant Local Area Network (LAN) – The LAN is used for communication between the Operator Stations and other PC based equipment. Each unit is connected to two completely separate Local Area Networks for maximum redundancy. • Dual redundant Controller Area Network (CAN) – The CAN is used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to two completely separate CAN-buses for maximum redundancy. • Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) – The dPSC is a dual two channel CAN gateway. In most cases the two channels are working in parallel on redundant CAN lines. The main function of the dPSC is to process messages from the a local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global process bus, where they are available for other dPSCs and System Gateways. • Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) – The PSS is used to segment the CAN-bus so that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will not affect the functions in the other segments. • System Gateway (SGW) – The SGW connects two CAN lines to two Local Area Network lines. The main purpose is to receive messages from the two process buses running CAN, and update the main Operator Station database. Different selections of these units are used to configure each individual system. K-Chief 500 is a fully microprocessor-based system. It is decentralised for safety and ease of installation, but operation is centralised using Operator Stations (OS).

2.3.2 Decentralized system architecture The heart of the K-Chief 500 system is the small family of different intelligent I/O units called Distributed Processing Units. These communicate with each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. All monitoring and automation functions are carried out by the Distributed Processing Units, while the centralised Operator Stations provide the Man Machine Interface. Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in number and type of analogue or digital input and output channels. The number of channels varies from 8 to 32. To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit, the appropriate software and parameters are down-loaded to the unit. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to perform

312401/B

23


alarm functions, some control functions, some safety functions or any combination of these. This makes it easy to separate automation system functions. The process-bus used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units in the K-Chief 500 system is the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. For systems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or for other design reasons, System Gateways (SGW) may be added to the CAN network. These units provide the necessary segregation of the automation system between for instance the different sections of an alarm and monitoring system. The System Gateways do not lower system performance or limit the possibilities for locating operator stations. The K-Chief 500 is designed to accept both a “grounded” or a “floating” earth installation. The latter installation method is required by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types. Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems and ground leakage detection. The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for immunity against single failures. Each Distributed Processing Unit has an internal three-way galvanic isolation between power, communication and input/output channels. If a unit fails, this will not affect the power source, communication bus or damage the sensors. The Built In System Test (BIST) will detect the error and warn the operator. Failures to the process-bus, cabling or connected sensors will also be detected by the Built In System Test. Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be done without turning the power off the K-Chief 500. The procedure is simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit, and then mount and reconnect a replacement. The operator then requests the system to replace the module, software is automatically down-loaded and the Distributed Processing Unit starts operating. All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure, satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding locations. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock absorbers. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. The Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some European Union flagstate vessels. They also meet the requirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the European Union Maritime Directive (EMD), satisfying all the new Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements.

24

312401/B

System description

2.3.3 Centralized operation The K-Chief 500 system is operated through a number of Operator Stations. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room. Additional stations may be located in the Wheelhouse, Cargo Control Room, Damage Control Room, Ship’s Office or other parts of the vessel. The Operator Stations are normally connected to the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual Redundant Control Area Network. The Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphic displays and are operated through a purpose built Operator Panel. The Operator Stations provides the operator with a number of standard display pictures containing information about the engine and surrounding equipment. Control of any of the Distributed Processing Units can be performed from the Operator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities are provided in both the machinery space and the Engine Control Room. Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery space, and the Watch Calling system allows automatic calling of duty engineers. This allows both the machinery space and the Engine Control Room to be safely left unmanned, while the machinery watch is carried out from the Bridge. All Operator Stations are Windows based personal computers, type approved for maritime use. They work in parallel; none of them acts as master. All are interconnected via the dual redundant local area network. Although every Operator Station is identical, access to vital functions may be configured differently. The control availability is defined by extensive use of software password access. Some Operator Stations, such as units located in the Ship’s Office, are normally used for monitoring only. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms or execution of control commands. All general information such as monitoring of alarms, trends and graphics are available for inspection. Changing a limit or parameter on one Operator Station will automatically update all other Operator Stations. All operator actions, such as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of an alarm limit, are logged and time tagged (optional). Whenever a variable or state changes significantly the Distributed Processing Units update the database in each of the Operator Stations. This means that data displayed at any Operator Station is always up-to-date. There is no need to request data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. As a result of this, the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area Network is kept to a minimum, giving extremely fast data access. The Operator Station serves as the database host for process data, engineering data and software. Software for Operator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Units are stored

312401/B

25


here. They include functions for automatic down-loading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units at commissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit is replaced. Configuration control of the K-Chief 500 systems is taken care of by an automatic version update at any change of the engineering database or the application software. The system logs all changes made. Version numbers and additional information can at any time be individually inspected for each K-Chief 500, as required by the major classification societies. Our commissioning editor (SeaMate) is used to configure or modify the functionality of the K-Chief 500 and is used to generate “as-built documentation”. The local area network included as part of K-Chief 500 system can interface with personal computers for remote monitoring and even with other external computer systems.

26

312401/B

System description

2.4 Alarm system 2.4.1 Alarms Alarm groups

All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups. Each alarm group is displayed on the left side of the Operator Station screen when the Navigator image is displayed. The Navigator is an image which is shown when the HOME button on the Control Room Panel is pushed. The Navigator image makes it easy to navigate to the wanted information in the K-Chief 500 system. For more information on the Navigator please see Navigator on page 86 . Alarm types Alarm detection for analogue signals

The following functions are included: • Instrument failure alarms • Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down) • Low process alarms • High process alarms • High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down) • Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm fluctuations • Adjustable filters to remove fluctuations in the incoming signals • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals

The following functions are included: • High process alarms (open or closed) • Return to normal detection • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check

The following functions are included: • High process alarms (open or closed) • Line broken alarm • Line short alarm • Return to normal detection • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages

312401/B

27


Inhibit alarm

Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified condition is present. This function is accomplished by defining a signal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms. An adjustable time delay is available to extend the inhibit situation for each signal. Alarm state indication

The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. The alarm tag, description and state will be displayed. The following states are used by the system: • On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN • On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED • On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN • On/off signal short alarm: SHORT • Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside low range: IFL (Instrument Failure Low) • Analogue signal instrument failure, signal value outside high range: IFH (Instrument Failure High) • Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH • Analogue signal low alarm: LOW • Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI • Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO • On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC • On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN • On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: INHIBIT Alarm text colour

Different colours have been used to visually distinguish between the alarm states. The meaning of the different colours is listed below: • Normal state: GREEN • Alarm state, not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*) • State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED • Alarm state, acknowledged: YELLOW • Alarm state, inhibited: BLUE • Not updated or invalid values: ORANGE • Can be customised for extra critical alarms: MAGENTA

28

312401/B

System description

Alarm and monitoring displays

There are several display pages for presenting alarms and monitored values. The alarm pages comprise: • Alarm group display page • Alarm summary page, containing a list of all active alarms • Alarm history page, containing a consecutive list of time-stamped alarms The monitoring pages include: • Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group • Selected points display (and logging facility) • Tag details, giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system 2.4.1.1 Alarm acknowledge

It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window, alarm group or alarm summary is displayed. Alarm acknowledgement for separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is done through a single push. It removes the alarm text in the Alarm window (down to the right on the display), and changes the colour on the alarm text in the list views. 2.4.1.2 Sound off

It is possible to make the alarm sound silent after it has notified an alarm. This is done by a single push on the sound off button. The alarm text in the Alarm window (down to the right on the display) is not changed by pushing the button.

312401/B

29


2.5 System functions, Alarm and Monitoring System 2.5.1 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring The K-Chief 500 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates the deviation between the individual cylinders and the average value of all cylinders. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds the acceptable limit. Alarm limits are continuously calculated based on the engine load. The dead-band is set narrower as the engine load increases. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping and sensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account. Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are made when relevant. The maximum number of cylinders for each engine or cylinder bank is 16. As the average temperature is used as reference for the deviations, it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load. When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked.

2.5.2 Trend monitoring The K-Chief 500 automatically records selected measurements, and stores them for use in the trend monitoring system. This system can display recorded and present data for all variables as curves. The trend monitoring system is a part of the Operator Station and consists of two trend displays: Short trend and Long trend. Please see How to make your own short trend display on page 162 and How to make your own long trend display on page 176 for more details.

2.5.3 Fuel performance system (optional) The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumption and assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. To study performance parameters momentary values are available. Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such as for a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting. Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units making continuous measurements. The following sensor data are required: • Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine • Both input and output flow must be measured • Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows

30

312401/B

System description

• Running signal for each propulsion engine • Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft • Ship speed Based on these measurements the following performance parameters are calculated: • Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs • Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs • Hull efficiency in kg/nm • Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh • Shaft power for each shaft in MW • Total shaft power in MW Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyage period. Accumulated data includes: • Duration of voyage in hours • Distance travelled in nautical miles • Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons • Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons • Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh • Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. When doing so, the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fuel economising measurements and calculations are available as a display window on any of the Operator Stations.

2.5.4 Running hours and counters To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which components need overhauling, it is important to know the running hours for each component. The K-Chief 500 running hours function keeps track of the running hours for selected pumps, fans, compressors, purifiers, generators etc., and present the result to the operator on demand. Any status signal interfaced to the K-Chief 500 can be used to count running hours. Two separate counter functions are available: • Counter for total active running hour • Lap counter A table containing all parameters and their running hour values can be printed on demand. Values can be manually reset when units have been overhauled. When required, adjustments can be made to the total running hour or lap counter for any unit. Underneath is a K-Chief 500 display showing a counter image.

312401/B

31


Figure 3

Counter display

2.5.5 Tank display The K-Chief 500 system has an optional tank level monitoring system. It has different types of standard tank displays: • Cargo tank density display • General tank display • Level/ullage correction display • Ship display Cargo tank density display

It displays density calculations and different parameters. The following information is provided for each tank: • • • • •

Input number for the tank Name of the actual tank Type of tank content American Petroleum Institute (API) density Density in vacuum at 15ºC

• • • •

Density in air at 15ºC Density in air at specified temperature T [ºC] Temperature T [ºC] at which the density above is given Change in density (air) for a change in temperature of 1ºC

• Positive value if density is increasing by drop in temperature • Density at actual temperature

32

312401/B

System description

General tank display

The purpose of this display is to show the result of tank calculation for ballast-, fuel oil and miscellaneous tanks. The following information is provided for each tank: • Input number for the tank • Name of the tank • Type of tank content • Actual level corrected for specific gravity, sensor offset, trim and list • Actual volume in percent of full tank • Actual volume in cubic meter • Specific gravity at actual temperature • Weight in metric tonnes Level correction display

This display shows the parameters used for ullage and level correction calculations for each tank. The purpose of this display is to give the user a possibility to see the parameters used for the correction. Information provided in the display: • Input number for the tank • Name of the actual tank • Type of tank content • Measured ullage or level before corrections (this value will be displayed at the corresponding DPU if connected) • Specific gravity at actual temperature (left blank if ullage measuring) • Sensor height above lowest point of tank (left blank if ullage measuring) • Longitudinal correction for level sensor location (left blank if trim tables) • Transverse correction for level sensor location • Actual ullage or level corrected for specific gravity, sensor offset, trim and list Ship display

It displays the following: • Display of own ship’s main data • Total tank content display • Draught and trim display • Enter/change sea specific gravity • Trim/list type selection

312401/B

33


2.5.6 Engine monitoring Kongsberg Engine Monitoring Systems consist of bearing monitoring components covering Bearing Wear, Water in Oil, Temperature of all bearings and additional measuring points like: Cylinder liner, exhaust gas temperature ,Torque measurement Software and system components are common with K-Chief 500 and AutoChief C20, allowing integration and joined support. Data transfer via CAN bus is the base for easy communication with other Kongsberg systems.

Bearing Monitoring

The Kongsberg Bearing Monitoring Systems consist of the PS-10 Bearing Wear Monitoring, Sentry Wireless Temperature Monitoring and PT100 Main Bearing Temperature

34

312401/B

System description

Sensors. In combination these solutions will give the most optimal monitoring of crosshead, crank and main bearing wear/temperature on 2-stroke engines. In a modern large bore two-stroke diesel engine, the reliability, particularly for critical components are vital. All major engine manufacturers continually work to maintain and improve reliability of existing and future machines in spite of i.e. higher output demands. In this picture bearing monitoring is important. The reason for this is firstly that constant monitoring of operating conditions and performance increases the chance of detecting a developing problem at an early stage. Secondly, experience has showed that some components fail most frequently shortly after an inspection, due to incorrect reassembly, foreign particles being introduced etc. Finally, servicing a part only when necessary reduces the owner’s maintenance costs. Both the Kongsberg Bearing Wear Monitoring and the Kongsberg Bearing Temperature Solutions have the function of predicting a bearing damage before it becomes critical. The systems will provide the crew with an early warning if any of the crank train bearings (crosshead-, crank- and main bearings) has an unexpected bearing problem during service. By providing advanced warning of impending problems, the consequential damage to crankshafts and connecting rods may be avoided. In addition the following advantages might be obtained by installing Kongsberg Bearing Monitoring Solutions; • Extended time between “open up” intervals of bearings • Reduction of insurance costs The above benefits will call for individual discussions with the relevant Classification Society / Insurance Company. Bearing Wear Monitoring

The Bearing Wear Monitoring system predicts bearing wear in large two-stroke diesel engines, before it becomes critical. The system will provide an early warning if any of the three crank-train bearings (crosshead-, crank- and mean bearing) experience unexpected problems during ship operation. The Bearing Wear sensor is based on a high quality magnetic sensing element. The measurements take place every time the crosshead passes Bottom Dead Centre (BDC). Engine speed is measured continuously to compensate for engine loads and rpm. The Kongsberg BWM system complies with MAN specifications on all points. This includes Alarm log, short –and long term trend and data storage over more than 5 years. These functions are also available for other Kongsberg systems that easily can be connected to the BWM computer.

312401/B

35


Sentry; Wireless temperature monitoring

Sentry is designed to monitor the temperature of crank pinand crosshead bearings in diesel engines. These bearings can experience rapid temperature changes during damage development. The sensors are designed to give immediate response to the monitoring system. The measurement system is based on radar technology with passive sensors without need of an external power source. A low energy and high frequency radar pulse is transmitted to the Sentry Wireless Sensor via the Sentry Stationary Antenna. When the sensor passes the antenna, the radar pulse is picked up and reflected back to the Sentry Signal Processing Unit. The shape and characteristics of the reflected pulse determine the temperature of the sensor, i.e. the bearing temperature. The processing unit software calculates the temperature and transmits this to the engine control and monitoring system. The installation of the stationary antenna related to the sensor is flexible and non-critical.

36

312401/B

System description

Main Bearing temperature

Custom designed main bearing temperature sensors can be fitted into any type of 2-stroke diesel engines. The sensors are mounted on the main bearing girder with the tip of the sensor in direct contact with the bearing shell. The sensor measures the combined temperatures of the bearing shell and of the lubrication oil that flows from the bearing. Cylinder Liner Temperature

The Cylinder Liner Monitoring system measures temperatures in the upper part of the cylinder liner 5-6 mm from the inner surface, thus monitoring the piston running performance in operation. Increased friction between the piston rings and the cylinder liner creates an elevated temperature level, leading to abnormal wear and eventually to piston breakage.

312401/B

37


Scuffing monitoring and alarm

The added Kongsberg software and system components provide detection of cylinder liner scuffing. Scuffing occurs at sub-alarm level temperatures and is recognized by fluctuation temperature readings. When scuffing is detected, an alarm is given for the related cylinder. Scuffing control

When scuffing is detected an alarm is given for the related cylinder. An output is then given to the cylinder lubrication system that will increase the amount of cylinder lubrication oil to normalize the condition of the given liner. This function is only available in combination with the MAN Diesel Alpha lubricator. Water in oil detection

The quality of the lubrication oil is critical. Only a small content of water reduces the oils ability to lubricate the bearings. When the water content is high enough for the water to segregate from

38

312401/B

System description

the oil a rapid corrosive process of the bearings will occur. The life time of a Tin/Aluminium bearing may be reduced to only a few hours. This measuring point has become standard on all new MAN Diesel engines. MetaPower torque monitoring

The intention of MetaPower system is to enable the ship owner to optimize the operation parameters of the ship, i.e. to maintain or increase the speed with less consumption of fuel. This is carried out by measuring exact power transferred to the propeller(s) during the trimming procedure. MetaPower is based on a patented LASER technology. The principle is as follows:

An IR beam is transmitted from the processing unit (8) through optical fibre (3). In the optical forks (6) and (7) placed in a distance of around 1 m from each other, the light will be pulse modulated by the coding wheels (1) and (2). The modulation will depend on the shaft speed and torque. The signal is received in the processing unit, processed and displayed as rpm, torque and power on system level. The processing unit may via serial communication, analogue or digital outputs be connected to the automation system.

312401/B

39


2.6 System functions, Bridge Watch Monitoring System 2.6.1 About the Bridge Watch Monitoring System The Bridge Watch Monitoring System serves the following purposes: • Central bridge alarm panel provides visual and audible alarms and warnings. These are initiated by systems and individual navigation equipment serving primary bridge functions. • Bridge watch monitoring feature for detection of unattended bridge or operator disability based on interval checking. • Alarm transfer to specific locations outside the bridge to alert and call the master and back-up navigator(s), automatically initiated in case the bridge alarms are not attended to or an operator disability is detected. • Call back-up navigator for purpose of manual and instant initiation of alarm transfer from bridge for alert and call of master and back-up navigator(s).

2.6.2 About bridge watch alarms The Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems generates a prewarning and an alarm when the interval timers have expired. • Prewarning: Prewarnings are only given on the bridge. – 30 seconds before the alarm timer expires, a prewarning lamp starts flashing. – 15 seconds before the alarm timer expires, a prewarning buzzer starts sounding. • Alarm: The alarm is configurable to sound between 3 and 12 minutes after the last alarm-timer reset. To reset the alarm timer, push: – Any external sound off button – Any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring panel The alarm is given as follows: • When the alarm timer has expired in the captains and back-up officers quarters. • After an additional delay called “Last stage delay”. The alarm is given in the captain’s and all navigating officer’s quarters and in public areas. The “Last stage delay” is configurable between 0 and 3 minutes.

40

312401/B

System description

2.7 System functions, Process Control System All data acquisition, signal conditioning, signal scaling and process control is performed by each individual Distributed Processing Unit. This solution guarantees that local operation is available even if the Operator Stations are not functioning.

2.7.1 Stand-by pumps General

Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Remote control is available from the Operator Stations in two ways: • Through the stand by pump display (mimic diagrams). • Through a (mimic) diagram included in the monitoring and control system. Stand by start at low pressure

When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pump automatically starts. The limit may be adjusted if an analogue sensor is used. Inhibit stand by start

Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at a group start, until the pressure has been built up. The stand by logic can also be inhibited by an external condition, such as “main engine stopped”, “aux engine stopped” or a similar condition. Restart after blackout

Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout. These units are included in a start sequence. The delay time defined in the Distributed Processing Unit’s pump logic determines the start sequence. The operator can adjust the sequence timing. Group start of pumps

Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence. Alarms from the stand by pump logic

• Stand by start alarm • Auto start fail or trip • Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longer in stand by mode). Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used for the control functions.

312401/B

41


Limits: All limits are downloaded from the Operator Station as part of its database. The limits may be adjusted at the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pump system, the signals from the motor starters and the process are normally routed to different Distributed Processing Units. This configuration allows the system to work even if one of the Distributed Processing Unit fails. The stand by pump logic is also active when the Operator Station is down.

2.7.2 Valve control General

Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Remote control is available through the displays on the Operator Stations. Valve Types

Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digital output signal. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by the signals by one or two limit switches. Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digital output and two input signals. The valve is opened or closed by pulsing a relay. Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type is controlled by two digital outputs; two digital inputs and an analogue input signal. The valve position is set within a defined dead band by pulsing a relay. Additional functions

In addition, the following functions are available as part of the valve control system: • Pulsed output. • Automatic closing of a set of valves. • Automatic opening or closing of valves. • Close on an analogue setpoint, using deadband. • Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve, remote OPEN/CLOSE function. Close when a “low level” switch opens. • Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSE function. Close when a “low level” switch opens. • Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset.

42

312401/B

System description

2.7.3 PID controllers The PID controller system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. All combinations of PID controllers are available. Cascade control is accomplished by connecting two controllers together. The PID controllers can be configured from the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. The following parameters are available: • Tuning parameters (gain, integration time and derivation time) • Controller setpoint • Output mode (true control mode, AUTO, or valve position control mode, SEMIAUTO) • Controller types (P, PI, PD or PID) • Selection of input and output signal type • Input and output channel number • Sampling time

2.7.4 Compressor control The compressor control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. The main purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value. This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stop of compressors, restart after blackout and automatic drain control. The compressor control system communicates with the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled from here.

2.7.5 Purifier control The purifier control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. The purifier control program is specially written to operate Alfa Laval’s self cleaning oil purifiers, and includes operation of the following equipment: • Crude oil booster pump (optional) • Crude oil temperature controller • Purifiers • Sealing valves • Discharge valves The equipment may be controlled from the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. Purifier configuration is selected manually by operating different by-pass valves directly. The purifier control program will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel. Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic

312401/B

43


display by showing the oil path as green lines. Purifier no. 1 will always run as purifier, whereas purifier no. 2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier.

2.7.6 Boiler control The boiler control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. The program consists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to different types of boilers. The boiler control system uses fail checking extensively, and employs a program for controlled shut down, and provides visible alarms. Boiler system parameters are available on the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. All parameters are found in the steam system display. System information such as alarms and analogue values are part of the normal K-Chief 500 alarm and monitoring system. The boiler control involves total control of the following equipment: • Fuel oil stand-by pumps • Burner motor • Fuel pre-heater • Nozzles • Ignition unit • Air damper • Steam release valve These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit.

44

312401/B

System description

2.8 System functions, Power Management System 2.8.1 Introduction The Power Management System controls the power generation and distribution on board the vessel. It includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the power plant. The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit per connected generator unit. Each performs the power management functions of the connected generator unit. The system is suitable for electrical generators driven by a diesel engine, a steam turbine or by the propeller shaft. The Distributed Processing Units have different configurations and control strategies depending on the type of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected to the Operator Station, which allows the operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functions that can be performed locally. For complex Power Management Systems an additional Distributed Processing Unit, the dPSC, is used for mode control etc. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function and communication, and allows separation of local PMS CAN process bus data traffic from other parts of the global CAN-network of the K-Chief 500 system. The Power Management System will be adapted to the specific configuration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. In order to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions for alarm, control and safety, these functions have been addressed to separate Distributed Processing Units like this: • Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (when needed). • PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1) for each generator. • Diesel generator safety system: A separate Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1). • Bus-tie control: A Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1) for each bus-tie. • Alarms: Two Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units. Note

These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus.

312401/B

45


2.8.2 Generator control functions Synchronizing

The Power Management System automatically selects and synchronizes generators to the net as required. A Distributed Processing Unit controls speed, deviation of voltage/frequency and breaker. Frequency control and loadsharing

When automatic mode is selected, one of the Distributed Processing Units must be defined as Master. The Distributed Processing Unit designated as “ No.1 Stand-By” will automatically be master if no other master selection is made. The bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard are available in all the Distributed Processing Units. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequency and voltage values. It maintains a constant bus frequency by controlling its engine’s speed. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-by Distributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing. Asymmetric loadsharing

The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalanced load-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almost maximum load for a pre-defined period, while the second generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. At the expiration of the defined period, the generators swap loads. Symmetric loadsharing

If two or more generators are running and asymmetric load-sharing has not been requested, the load is shared equally between the generators. Load-dependent start/stop of the Stand-by Generators

Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automatically start, synchronise and connect its generator according to its assigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of the following requests: • Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators in operation cannot provide enough power. • A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator has developed a fault, which prevents it from maintaining its share of the load. • A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator is approaching the point of overload.

46

312401/B

System description

It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature. Whenever blocked, the stand-by generator will keep on running, independent of the load parameters. This feature is especially useful when a heavy consumer (e.g. a ship’s bow thruster) is required to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals. Automatic start-and-connect after a power blackout

The power blackout logic is triggered when the Power Management System detects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage is low. (less than 10 % of normal). In a power blackout situation, all of the generators controlled by each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will start and connect to the bus. Supervision of Heavy Consumer switch-on

Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-on control heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not cause a power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of the operating generators, the Power Management System will start up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficient capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted.

2.8.3 Power management functions with shaft generator Main functions

One Distributed Processing Unit controls the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit, whereas other Distributed Processing Units control the bus-tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptable to various switchboard configurations. The following functions are available: • Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus-tie breaker with automatic synchronisation • Control of the connection and disconnection of bow- and stern thrusters • Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that control the auxiliary generator sets Operational modes and mode control

The Power Management System allows many different modes of operation. Four standard modes are provided. Underneath are examples with 1 Shaft Generator (SG), 2 Diesel Generators (DG), 2 bus-ties and 1 bow thruster.

312401/B

47


• Harbour: Both DGs are running. Both bus-ties are closed. This mode allows the bow thruster to be started. If the load is low, and the bow thruster is not running, the stand-by DG will automatically be disconnected and stopped. This is blocked if the thruster is running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator Distributed Processing Unit is activated. • At sea: The SG is running. Both bus-ties are closed. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. Both DGs are stopped and stand-by ready for start. • Cargo handling: Bus-tie 2 is open. One or two DGs power consumers on port bus bar. The SG is powering heavy consumers on the stand-by bus bar. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. • Manoeuvre: Bus-tie 1 is open. One or two DGs power consumers on port busbar. The shaft generator power the bow thruster only. Transition between these modes is possible in two ways: • Mode control: Selection of one of the pre-defined operational modes, leading to a set of actions which the operator has to perform in order to put the Power Generating System into that mode. • One-touch mode control: Selection of one of the pre-defined operational modes, leading to a sequence of automatic events to put the Power Generating system into that mode. This one-touch control is to be made from the Operator Station. Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the net, to auxiliary generators powering the net, or to split net operation, the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will give a start and connect command to at least two auxiliary generators. Upon reception of this command, the Power Management System will only start one diesel at a time. Shaft Generator overload

The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check for overload of the shaft generator. If overloaded for more than a pre-defined period of time, a request for split net is generated. Shaft- and Auxiliary Generators in parallel

There is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing between shaft- and auxiliary generators. The bus-tie will automatically be disconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit. Shaft Generator control functions

The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and alarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing

48

312401/B

System description

Unit has facilities for remote start and stop. A speed drop function versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with diesel generators. When the controller is set to remote operation mode, the following functions are available: • Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams • Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams • Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft generator itself • Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is running (additional function to controller, with its own safety functions for the shaft generator) When the shaft generator is connected, the master Distributed Processing Unit will do load sharing on the diesel generator in parallel with the shaft generator. The frequency on the bus bar is a result of the ME (Main Engine) speed. Parallel load sharing between shaft generator and diesel generators are limited in time, controlled from the Power Management System. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and the Distributed Processing Units perform the functions for the Power Management System completely independent of the Alarm and Monitoring System.

312401/B

49


3 UNIT DESCRIPTIONS 3.1 Overview This chapter gives a brief description of the main units of the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. Note

The K-Chief 500 is a modular system, consisting of standard main units as Operator Stations, Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. For a specific project configuration, the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class. Topics

Operator Station (OS) on page 51 Midi Operator Station (MOS) on page 52 Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 53 Input Panel (INP) on page 54 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) on page 55 Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 56 on page Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) on page 59 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) on page 60 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) on page 64 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) on page 64 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a) on page 65 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) on page 66 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) on page 66 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) on page 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) on page 68 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) on page 69 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) on page 70 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) on page 71 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) on page 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) on page 72 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) on page 73 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) on page 75

50

312401/B

Unit descriptions

3.2 Operator Stations and Operator Panels 3.2.1 Operator Station (OS) The Operator Station is a type approved personal computer, connected to a colour graphics display and a printer. Operator input is either done through a standard personal computer keyboard or through specially designed Operator Panels, providing easy access to the different operator functions. Figure 4

Operator Station (OS)

The Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (for on-demand printing), an alarm printer, log printer or colour hard copy unit. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarm condition, several things happens. In the Alarm Navigator the alarm group which contains the alarm will start to flicker. The alarm is also displayed in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printer automatically prints the alarm. By clicking on the flickering alarmgroup, more detailed alarm information is displayed on the colour graphics display. Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit, such as alarm or normal status data, can also be shown on the colour graphics display, or printed on demand. Sensor data can be presented as a bar graph (analogue sensors) or a trend curve (analogue and digital sensors). Selected

312401/B

51


sensor data may be printed automatically at fixed intervals. The system can display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all active alarms. The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all status changes, such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm condition cleared. When all alarm conditions are cleared, the system returns to normal. Alarm limits and delays are adjustable by using the Operator Panel. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines, pumps and related items. This function can also accumulate flow. Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may be printed. The Operator Station is used when transferring machinery watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room, and selecting the engineer for watch-call duty. All available engineers, whether on duty or not, may be called to the engine control room in case of an emergency.

3.2.2 Midi Operator Station (MOS) The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose Operator Station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship, even out on deck. It allows alarm indication, process control and power management. Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a high resolution colour graphical display. For small alarm systems it can be the only Operator Station. The Midi Operator Station contains a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and uses these to display mimic diagrams. Figure 5

Alarm and Monitoring System (cJoy)

The Midi Operator Station gives the operator the possibility to: • Monitor the status of any object, from a single input signal to a controllable object

52

312401/B

Unit descriptions

• Be informed of any process- or system alarm, through visual and audible signals • Interface to a printer for alarm logging purposes • Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphical feedback • Reconfigure the distributed database located in the Distributed Processing Units, through numeric and alphanumeric inputs.

3.2.3 Control Room Panel (CRP) The Control Room Panel (CRP) contains the following: • A 19 buttons keypad for screen navigation, entering numbers and text into the system • A trackball with seven buttons integrated in the circular trackball cover • An alarm area containing three alarm buttons and an alarm lamp (ACK, “Silence" and ALARM VIEW). • A command area containing three command buttons (TAKE, GIVE and STATUS). They are related to access and control transfer, but are not used for Alarm and Monitoring Systems without Process Control and Power Management. • A panel area containing three status lamps (POWER, FAULT and ALARM) The CRP do not have background light. It is meant to be placed in a room with light, like the control room. But the CRP have LED indicators, for instance in the alarm and panel area. The CRP is powered from 24 Vdc.

312401/B

53


Figure 6

Control Room Panel (CRP)

3.2.4 Input Panel (INP) The Input Panel contains a 19 buttons keypad for screen navigation, entering numbers and text into the system It has also a trackball with seven buttons integrated in the circular trackball cover. The background light can be dimmed from the Operator Station which the panel is a part of. A light sensor registers the light intensity above the panel and can be used for controlling background light and status lamps automatically. The Input Panel is powered from 24 Vdc.

54

312401/B

Unit descriptions

Figure 7

Input Panel (INP)

3.2.5 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) The ALC Panel is used for Command Control and Alarm Control by pushing dedicated buttons, and it displays and sounds system status by its status lamps and buzzers. The light intensity of the background light and the status lamps can be dimmed from the Operator Station which the panel is a part of. The ALC Panel is powered and communicates through a single USB cable. The ALC Panel contains the following controls and indicators: • Three status lamps (POWER, FAULT and ALARM) • Three command buttons (TAKE, GIVE and STATUS).They are related to access and control transfer, but are not used for Alarm and Monitoring Systems without Process Control and Power Management. • Three alarm buttons (ACK, “Silence" and ALARM VIEW), and an alarm lamp.

312401/B

55


Figure 8

Alarm & Control Panel (ALC)

3.2.6 Touch Control Panel (TCP) The Touch Control Panel (TCP) is used to interact with the images on the colour monitor of the Operator Station of the K-Chief 500 system. The image on the TCP is called the Navigator and is divided in two parts; the Alarm Navigator and the Graphic Display Navigator. The Navigator is constantly displayed to give easy access to all the information of the K-Chief 500 system. The TCP frame is made of aluminium and stainless steel. The rear has several apertures for sufficient ventilation. The TCP is easy to install into a console. It is mounted smoothly using four bolts, one in each corner. To reduce the reflective shine from the sun, the TCP is anti-glare. It is also dimmable, so it can be adjusted for use during day and night time.

56

312401/B

Unit descriptions

Figure 9

312401/B

Touch Control Panel (TCP)

57


3.3 Watch Calling System 3.3.1 Purpose The watch calling system is designed to allow the engine room and the control room to be periodically unmanned. It consists of: • Watch Bridge Units (WBU) • Watch Cabin Units (WCU) • Operator Stations The main purposes of Watch Bridge Units are: • To indicate the Watch Responsible area • To indicate who is On Duty • To indicate the current alarm status • To sound a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs and someone is On Duty • To allow you to contact (call) duty personnel, and/or all personnel The main purposes of Watch Cabin Units are: • To indicate who is On Duty • To indicate the current alarm status • To indicates when you are being called and who is calling • To sound a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs Figure 10

Basic Watch Calling System components

3.3.2 Watch Calling repeat alarm feature The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors all responses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm is acknowledged. The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarms using three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not go unacknowledged: First-time/original alarm

The first-time/original alarm is relayed to:

58

312401/B

Unit descriptions

• The area designated as Watch Responsible • The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas Second-time/1st repeat alarm

If the alarm remains unacknowledged after a set period of time, it is repeated and relayed to: • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas Third-time/2nd repeat alarm

If the alarm is still not acknowledged, after a set period of time, it is repeated and relayed to: • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas

3.3.3 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist, an LED and a LCD type. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text. Figure 11

312401/B

Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LCD type

59


Figure 12

Watch Bridge Unit (WBU), LED type

When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or more engineers must be on call. A general alarm signal will call them to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. The alarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is a buzzer sound and a single or group alarm lamp which is flashing. When an alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is cleared, appropriate indications are given on the Watch Bridge Unit. The K-Chief 500 prevents the bridge from assuming watch responsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. The bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quarters at any time, for consultation etc. Acknowledgement of such calls is provided. Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having the machinery watch. Indicators show when an alarm has been acknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer will not sound.

3.3.4 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist, an LED and a LCD type. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. They are placed in the engineer’s cabins and in public areas. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text.

60

312401/B

Unit descriptions

Figure 13

Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LCD type

Figure 14

Watch Cabin Unit (WCU), LED type

To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge mode one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm condition arises a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineer’s cabins and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps. When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility, one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur the alarm signal will be given, both in the duty-engineers cabin and in the public areas. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Units are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing. The engineer will then normally go to the engine control room to find the cause of the alarm.

312401/B

61


When the alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room, or the situation is cleared, the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units. If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period of time, the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers’ quarters, and on the bridge, until it is acknowledged. The system can also be used to call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room without an alarm condition. Alarm indication without sounding the buzzer is configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-duty mode.

62

312401/B

Unit descriptions

3.4 Distributed Processing Units 3.4.1 Main characteristics A number of different Distributed Processing Units (DPU) are available for different tasks. The main functions of the Distributed Processing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. All units have the same mechanical construction and are built using the same electronic design principles. The main characteristics of the Distributed Processing Units are: • LED indicators on the housing for Watch-Dog, Run, General information, unit initialised and power polarity • Three-way isolation between I/O and power, I/O and process-bus, power and process-bus • Single printed circuit board design • Easy service replacement without setting trimmers, dip switches, jumpers or sockets • No additional EMC protection required (only IP) • Time synchronisation • Non-volatile memory • Remote alarms function • Dual CAN-bus interfaces • Software can be downloaded into the unit • Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature, power and sensor excitation overload • All parameters are stored in each unit • Each unit is remotely configurable • No serviceable parts inside • All connections are pluggable Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor. These are programmed for a number of different tasks such as detecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits. Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down of the machinery. Status information is continuously monitored by the K-Chief 500 Operator Stations through the system network. When an unacceptable condition is detected, the Distributed Process Unit and K-Chief 500 generates an alarm signal, identifies the responsible sensor, and provides information about the condition.

312401/B

63


3.4.2 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) This unit has 16 analogue input channels. Each channel is selectable as voltage, current and resistance input in different ranges and has free technical units scaling. It also incorporates a 5 to 500Hz counter channel. • 16 analogue or digital input channels • Scaled in technical units • 1 counter 5 to 500 Hz • Limit check • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds) • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 15

Remote Analogue input (RAi-16)

3.4.3 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) This unit has 10 analogue input channels. It is used for temperature measurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of different types. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhaust temperatures. A large variety of temperature elements can be connected, with ranges ± 50, ± 200, 0 to + 600 °C. A Cold Junction Compensation function is included. If external compensation is needed, the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16 is recommended. • 10 thermo-coupler input channels • Scaled in technical units • Limit check • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events

64

312401/B

Unit descriptions

• Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 16

Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc)

3.4.4 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a) These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts and include LED status indicators. • 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators • Input dry contacts • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 17

312401/B

Remote Digital Input (RDi-32)

65


Figure 18

Remote Digital Input (RDi-32a)

3.4.5 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) This unit has 8 analogue output channels. Each channel is selectable for voltage or current output in different ranges and almost free technical units scaling. This module is suited to drive analogue indicators. By placing the module close to instruments, long cables can be avoided. • 8 analogue output channels • ± 10 VDC / ±20 mA • CAN net status, error handling Figure 19

Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)

3.4.6 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) The RDo-16 module has 16 digital output channels and includes LED status indicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3 Amperes (resistive load). The maximum voltage is 230 VAC. • Change over, brake before make relay-contacts • Pulse on output • Pulse off output

66

312401/B

Unit descriptions

• CAN net status, error handling Figure 20

Remote Digital Output (RDo-16)

3.4.7 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output Distributed Processing Unit. It is particularly suited for electric generator control, main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems. The unit is equipped with four input channels, which can be individually configured to handle both analogue and digital signals. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a current signal. Based on these signals the following values can be measured and calculated: • AC voltage available from generator and busbar • AC current supplied from the generator • AC frequency of generator and busbar • Phase angle between AC voltages, for synchronising circuit breakers • Phase angle between AC voltage and current, for calculating reactive load, kVAr • Active load calculation based on AC voltage, current and phase angle The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups, measuring rotating speed of any machinery, in the speed range of 0 – 1500 Hz. The two analogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltage or current. The unit can further control six digital output channels; 2-pole relay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver with built-in loop fail detection facilities.

312401/B

67


Table 1

RIO-C1 Process Connections

Number of channels

Function

Level

6

Digital output

Solenoid valve driver or relay, max 3 A resistive load

2

Analogue output

mA

2

Analogue input, AC voltage (1-phase)

Max. 30 Vrms, 50/60 Hz

1

Analogue input, AC current

Max. 1 A, 50/60 Hz

4

Analogue/digital input, flexible

As RAi-16

2

Input from pickup

24 VDC (counter input)

4

Digital input

As RDI-32

• 21 analogue or digital, input and output channels with LED status indicator • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 21

Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1)

3.4.8 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs and outputs. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channels which are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. The digital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch) or an external 24 VDC or 24 VAC signal. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage. When the faulty sensor interface has returned to normal, the electronic

68

312401/B

Unit descriptions

fuse is automatically reset. The unit can control eight digital output channels, 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). It is particularly suited for control of pumps and valves. • 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator • 8 channels relays change over, brake before make • 8 channels digital inputs, with possibility for 24 VDC live input or dry contacts • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status, error handling Figure 22

Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2)

3.4.9 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) The RIO-C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers as well as switchboard equipment. The module has a 7-segment display trip indicator, to be independent of external indicators. The RIO-C3 module is available in two versions: • C3-GP for generator protection • C3-GDCP for generator and differential current protection The module has a dual 24 Vdc power connection to un-interruptible power supply and generator voltage. • Short circuit tripping of generator CB • Over current tripping of generator CB • Reverse power tripping of generator CB • Optional differential current protection • Local indication of reason for trip • Local reset of tripping

312401/B

69


• Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr) • Calculation of phase angle between voltage and current (cosine φ) Figure 23

Generator Protection (RIO-C3)

3.4.10 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators and bus-tie breakers. The in- and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers, as well as switchboard equipment. • Synchronize and connect of generator CB • Synchronize and connect of bus-tie CB • Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine • RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine • Optional control of primer pump for AE • Optional control of fuel selection for AE • Calculation of generator load (kW, kVAr) • Driving MSB instruments (kW, kVAr) • Load sharing between generators • AVR set point control (optional) Figure 24

70

Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4)

312401/B

Unit descriptions

3.4.11 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) The DGU module is designed to communicate with external equipment on serial line or CAN, and to communicate with ROS on global CAN. All communication ports on the module are isolated. Main features

• 2 CAN Communication channels • 2 CAN Communication channels, global • 2 serial lines, RS422/485. • Scaled in technical units. • Limit check. • Alarm and monitoring for all channels. • Trend. • Time stamp of alarms and events (0.001 seconds). • Self checking. • CAN net status, error handling. Figure 25

Digital Governor Unit (DGU)

3.4.12 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) The MSI 12 is a module for interfacing NMEA interfaces for recording and transmission of data. It is 4 NMEA ports for receiving, 4 NMEA ports for NMEA I/O communication, 4 Digital I/O and 10 digital output on the MSI 12. The modules connections are powered and communicates using USB interface to the computer. The digital signal inputs and outputs are powered from a separate 24 VDC input. The MSI 12 is designed to meet the requirements to signal interfaces as required to voyage data recorders as specified by IMO.

312401/B

71


Figure 26

Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12)

• Self check • Remote configurable • No trimmers or jumpers • No serviceable parts • All connections plugable • Type approved

3.4.13 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) The CAN line is vulnerable to both short-circuit and non-terminal line conditions. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CAN segment. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sections of a CAN segment from each other. Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on the ISO 11898 standard, with optical isolation. The Process Segment Starcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits that are not part of a CAN message. Thus short-circuit or malfunction on one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals. The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125 kBaud is 530 m. A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to 515 m. This length is the maximum line length between any two nodes in the CAN segment. For that reason it is advised to use the Process Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a process segment, where the segment is running through rough environment or fire zones.

72

312401/B

Unit descriptions

Figure 27

Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS)

3.4.14 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards. The module secures the installation of the power management and generator protection system by transforming the higher voltages to low and safe levels. The VCC-440 module is equipped with six voltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. The module handles three major tasks: • To supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltage from the measured three phase generator bus bars, L1-L2, L1-L3 and L2-L3, derated from 440 to 24 VAC • To supply the C3 generator protection module with 24 VDC power (1 A), using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source • To supply the C4 power management module with a single phase AC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and the switchboard busbar L1-L2, derated from 440 to 24 VAC As an option, the VCC module can be equipped with transformers for 690 VAC. Figure 28

312401/B

Voltage Converter Controller (VCC)

73


3.5 Gateways 3.5.1 Gateway types Two types of gateways are available: • System Gateway (SGW) – The SGW is used as a redundant gateway between the CAN-bus and the Local Area Network. • Dual Processing System Controller (dPSC) – The dPSC is used as a redundant gateway between two CAN segments (sections of the CAN-bus). The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolation between different parts of the network and to segregate process bus traffic in large systems. Messages are then converted between the network parts, while maintaining redundancy. Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (Distributed Processing Units, Watch Bridge Unit, Watch Cabin Units and Operator Panels) connected to the CAN-bus. If the communication with one node fails, the gateway will generate a system failure message identifying the node and the failure. The Dual Process System Controller may also be equipped with supervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks.

3.5.2 The System Gateway (SGW) The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual Local Area Network gateway. Its main task is to receive messages from the two CAN-buses and update the Operator Stations. Handling of operator commands and down-loading of parameters and software from the Operator Stations to the nodes (Distributed Processing Units) are handled as well. The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messages between the four CAN-buses. Global messages are data messages needed in more than one bus segment, typically messages for inhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down. The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message converter, sending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels and units having Process Data Segment located on the Local Area Network. The converter function will pre-process CAN messages and load them into a local database for distribution. The opposite way the converter will convert messages from Process Data Segment and route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units or Local Operator panels). All necessary configuration and software installation is done through the Local Area Network. The Simple Network Management Protocol is implemented to gain access via the

74

312401/B

Unit descriptions

Local Area Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases. Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24 Vdc power input and the System Gateway interfaces.

3.5.3 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CAN gateway. It consist of two processors, each with two CAN interfaces. The two processors have separate power connections, and they share information via dual port memory. In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel and provide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and for logic functions. The main function is to process messages from the local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus, where they are available for other dual Process Segment Controllers and System Gateways. It handles operator commands and down-loading of parameters and software from any System Gateway or Operator Station to the Distributed Processing Units connected to the local CAN-bus. When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set of Distributed Processing Units, both processors are working in parallel running the same process algorithm. In this way the dual Process Segment Controller operates as a running back-up. The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serial interface (RS–422/RS–485), primarily designated to communicate with other vendor’s equipment. Galvanic isolation is provided between the power connections and the CAN-bus and between the two CAN-buses. Figure 29

Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC)

The main features of the dPSC are: • Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanic isolated processors • Possible to power the two processors from separate power supplies • High speed data-link between the two processors

312401/B

75


• A node with CANopen master capability on all four CAN channels • Redundant routing of messages between local and global CAN segments • Dual serial interface, galvanic isolated, RS–422/RS–485, to communicate with other vendor’s equipment • Various redundant application process control logic When the two processors in the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling the same Distributed Processing Unit, they are working in parallel running the same process algorithm.

76

312401/B

User interface

4 USER INTERFACE 4.1 Overview The standard K-Chief 500 hardware user interface consists of a colour monitor screen, an Operator Panel and an alphanumeric keyboard. The monitor is used to display the operator images of the K-Chief 500 system. One or more Operator Panels are used to interact with these images. The alphanumeric keyboard is used for set-up and configuration purposes.

4.1.1 Operator functions The following main functions are accessible from the Operator Panels: • Alarm display selection and acknowledgement • Set-up and selection of information to be monitored • Set-up and activation of logging (printing) • Parameter adjustment • Extended alarm and watch-calling functions When only monitoring facilities are required, the panel’s control functions can be inhibited.

4.1.2 Alarm and monitoring display A number of display windows are available for presenting alarms and monitored values. Alarm windows include: • Alarm group display • Alarm summary, containing a list of all active alarms messages • Alarm history, containing a continuous list of time-stamped alarm messages Monitoring windows include: • Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group • Information display for a selected point • Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system

4.1.3 Process mimics, bar graphs and status displays The system can, as an option, include a number of standard display pictures for common information from the engine and surrounding equipment. The standard mimic windows are: • Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph • Bar graphs

312401/B

77


• Trend curves In addition, customised mimic diagrams will be designed for each project according to the piping diagrams. These display windows show the status of the equipment (open/closed, running/stopped, % filling etc.). They are interactive, thus allowing operation of the equipment.

4.1.4 Logging and hard copy All logs can be printed on request. The autolog and the selected points log can also be configured to be printed at specified intervals. All alarms are printed in red. As an option, a separate deskjet printer can be fitted to print mimic display windows.

4.1.5 Self-checking and diagnostics The on-line Built In Self-Test (BIST) system monitors the temperature, power and sensor excitation of each DPU. Testing of the Operator Stations and their ability to give alarms according to the requirements is initiated by clicking on the thumbnail called: ALARM TEST. This thumbnail can be found in the Navigator under the main group called: SERVICE. In addition, the electronics is automatically tested when power is turned on.

4.1.6 Access control In order to limit or enable control of the process from any Operator Station, an advanced password system is available. Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the use of passwords. All operator actions can be logged with time tags (optional).

78

312401/B

User interface

4.2 System images 4.2.1 Display layout The Operator Station screen display is divided into different fixed areas. See Display layout on page 79 for an illustration. Each of these areas has a separate function and they are updated independently of each other. The information displayed varies according to the type of command or task being performed. Figure 30

Display layout

• Title window: Contains the title of the information currently shown in the main window • Status window: The status window is divided into two columns. These contains important status information for user settings. • Time window: Shows current date and time. • Main window: Contains the image which displays information such as alarmlists, trends, monitoring etc. • Function window: Displays information related to user input. • Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent of the information displayed in the main window.

4.2.2 Image types in the main window The various system images displayed in the main window are for example:

312401/B

79


• Process image • List image • Trend image • Monitoring image • System configuration image • PDF viewer • Navigator image

4.2.3 Process image The Process image provides an enhanced graphical presentation of some parts of a process. Elements of the image can be linked to one or several function modules. An example of a Process image is shown below. Figure 31

Process image

4.2.4 List image The List image provides a sortable tabular view, containing selected information from the tags in the system. Two examples of List images are shown below.

80

312401/B

User interface

312401/B

Figure 32

Alarm history

Figure 33

Alarm summary

81


4.2.5 Trend image A Trend image fills the main view area. The image may have different presentations, and each trend may in turn contain several trend curves. The K-Chief 500 has two types of trends; short trend and long trend. An example of a Trend image is shown below. Figure 34

82

Long trend image

312401/B

User interface

4.2.6 Monitoring image There are several monitoring images in the K-Chief 500 system. An example of a monitoring image is shown underneath. Figure 35

312401/B

Group list image

83


4.2.7 System configuration image The System configuration images show the operational status information of all system components within the automation system. The lines between the equipment illustrate the communication network. An example of a System configuration image is shown below. Figure 36

84

System configuration image

312401/B

User interface

4.2.8 PDF viewer The PDF viewer is a tool in the Navigator used to open PDF documents. To add a PDF document, the document must be copied into this directory: c:\ros\config\doc

Remember to click Refresh List to be able to view the latest copied document. The document can now be opened from the document list, located in the upper left corner of the window. A page or a dialogue can be printed from the document by clicking on the Print Page button or Print Dialogue. The print function is located at the left side of the window. A search function is also available in the PDF viewer. The search function is located under the printing function, on the left side of the window. Type the word or the sentence you want to find and click on the All button. Select the wanted part of the document from the resulting list. An example of the PDF viewer is shown below. Figure 37

312401/B

PDF viewer image

85


4.2.9 Navigator The Navigator is the image on the Touch Control Panel. The image appears also at the Operator Station when the Home button on the Control Room Panel(CRP)/Input Panel(INP) is pushed. The Navigator gives access to all system displays. The Navigator is divided in 2 function areas, the Graphic Display Navigator and the Alarm Navigator. The different alarmgroups can be selected in the Alarm Navigator. In the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator you have the main groups, such as List views, Misc, Favorites, etc. Clicking on one of the main groups will give access to the sub-groups. These sub-groups are called Graphic Display Thumbnails. If there are more than twelve main groups in the system, the Page Up and Page Down buttons can be used to toggle between the groups. For easy navigation, press one of the alphanumeric keys (1 to 9) to jump to the corresponding sub-group. Below is an example of how the Navigator may look like. Figure 38

86

Navigator image

312401/B

User interface

4.2.10 How processes are displayed and controlled The number of images in a system depends on the amount of equipment under K-Chief 500 control. The system is designed in a way which gives varying levels of detail about the process depending on which image is selected. When an image showing an overall process is selected, there may not be enough room to display all the details on a single screen. The K-Chief 500 system will then have a number of images linked to the main image in order to show these details. This is exemplified by the following two images. The first image is an example of a Thermal oil primary system. The second image displays details of one Cargo heating secondary system. The second image appears when the grey button down to the right on the first image is pushed. Figure 39

312401/B

Primary system image (Thermal oil)

87


Figure 40

Secondary system image (Cargo Heating)

Normally not more than two levels of images will be used, although this can be arranged if required.

88

312401/B

User interface

4.3 ShipViewer ShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personal computer connected to the K-Chief 500 local area network. The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. It has similar viewing capabilities as those found in the Operator Station, but no control functions. The following systems can be monitored through the ShipViewer, dependent on the system configuration: • Engine monitoring and control system • Power management system • Fire system • Tank system The system presents online data, mimic diagrams, logged data and allows convenient printing facilities. It is a useful tool to avoid misunderstanding and lack of information. Main functions include: • Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams • Presentation of alarms • Presentation of alarm history • Status on open/closed valves, running/stopped equipment etc.

312401/B

89


5 GETTING STARTED 5.1 Operator stations and panels This chapter teaches you how to use the control functions and displays of the different K-Chief 500 Operator Stations and panels. It is intended for personnel just having started to use the system. The following subjects are covered: Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 91 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 95 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) on page 97 Using the Input Panel (INP) on page 100 Using the Midi Operator Station on page 103 Using the Watch Bridge Unit on page 107 Using the Watch Cabin Unit on page 110

90

312401/B

Getting started

5.2 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) 5.2.1 Understanding the CRP The CRP is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. It is divided into separate function areas. The following illustration shows the layout of the CRP. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided into groups. The button groups are explained below. Figure 41

Control Room Panel (CRP) layout

5.2.2 ALARM group buttons and lamp The ALARM group comprises one lamp and three buttons.

312401/B

91


ALARM LAMP

The lamp is blinking red when an alarm has been detected. The lamp is steadily lit when the ACK button has been pressed and the alarm is still active. ACK

When the ACK button is pushed, the alarm will be acknowledge. Two things will happen simultaneously. The alarm buzzer will be silent, and the alarm text will change colour to indicate the acknowledgement. See Alarm text colour on page 28 for more information on alarm colours and effects of acknowledge alarms in different images. SOUND OFF

When the sound of button is pushed, the alarm sound will be silent. ALARM VIEW

The alarm view button opens the alarm summary when it is pushed.

5.2.3 PANEL group lamps The PANEL group comprises two lamps. POWER

The lamp is lit green when the panel is on, and the power is OK. FAULT

The lamp is lit red when it has lost contact with the computer, or it is turned off.

5.2.4 COMMAND group buttons and lamps The COMMAND group comprises two buttons with lamps and one button without a lamp. They are used to transfer access and control. This is only used on systems with Power Management System (PMS) and/or Process Control TAKE

Push this button to request access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated GIVE

Push this button to give access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated. STATUS

When the status button is pushed, a window will be opened. The window contains information of for example who has controll/access.

92

312401/B

Getting started

5.2.5 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) The INPUT group comprises 19 buttons. One of these has a lamp. This is the abc... (toggle) button. HOME

This button is used to return to the Navigator window. abc...

This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode. Numeric mode is default. Press the button for one second to toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters), and not lit when it is in numeric mode (numbers). The lamp intensity can be adjusted from the computer. 2 / abc

The result of pushing this button depends on which mode the panel is in, numeric or alphanumeric mode. (The same applies for the following buttons: 3/def, 4/ghi, 5/jkl, 6/mno, 7/pqr, 8/tuv, 9/wxyz.) The number, 2, is entered if the button is pushed when the numeric mode is chosen. When alphanumeric mode is selected, the letter, a, will be entered by pushing one time at the button. Pushing two times, the letter, b, is entered. Three pushes enters the letter, c. PAGE UP

This button is used to scroll up in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). PAGE DOWN

This button is used to scroll down in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). ESCAPE

The ESC button is used the same way as an ESC button on a standard keyboard. Most common use is to exit/cancel/stop. For example use the escape button to exit from Tagdetails and return to the alarm history list. BACKSPACE

This button moves the cursor one position backward and deletes this preceding character. (Same function as on a standard keyboard) ENTER

This button is used the same way as the enter button on a standard keyboard. For example use the enter button to confirm a new entered value instead of clicking on the OK softbutton.

312401/B

93


5.2.6 Trackball There are a total of seven buttons around the trackball . Three of these buttons are the mouse buttons in front. The other four are located on each side of the trackball . Trackball

It is used for navigation on the screen. Mouse buttons

Same function as an ordinary PC-mouse. Arrow buttons

On each side of the trackball are the arrow buttons. They work like the arrow buttons on a standard alphanumeric keyboard.

5.2.7 Buzzer There are three buzzers. One is controlled directly by power, to alarm when power is lost (sounds for at least 60 sec.), and also by the local controller as the two others. The sound intensity is controlled by the number of buzzers activated, and the intensity setting can be configured. The sounder can be silenced both when power is lost and by the local controller.

5.2.8 Temperature sensor A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit, a system alarm is given.

94

312401/B

Getting started

5.3 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) 5.3.1 Understanding the TCP The TCP is a specially designed panel which provides easy access to the operator functions. It is divided into separate function areas. The following illustration shows the layout of the TCP. The different areas found on the panel can be divided into groups. These groups are explained and illustrated below. Figure 42

Touch Control Panel (TCP) layout

5.3.2 Alarm Navigator The Alarm Navigator gives easy access to the different alarm groups in the system. Beside each alarmgroup is the number of alarms which are not attended to displayed. When an alarm is not acknowledged, the number shown to the right of the corresponding alarm group will flicker. Some K-Chief 500 systems may have many alarm groups. In this case the softbuttons on the upper part of the Alarm Navigator can be used to toggle between the different alarm group lists. There is also a viewing of the number of alarms not acknowledged in each list on these softbuttons.

312401/B

95


5.3.3 Graphic Display Navigator The upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator holds softbuttons for the main groups, for example Favourites, List Views etc. By touching one of these softbuttons, the corresponding Graphic Display Thumbnail will appear under the main group area. By touching a Graphic Display Thumbnail the wanted information for that view will be displayed on the monitor of the Operator Station (OS). In the main group area is also a softbutton called, History. When this softbutton is touched, the nine last thumbnails that the operator has opened are displayed. A K-Chief 500 system may have more than 12 main groups. The

page up and page down softbuttons are then used to get access

to all the main groups.

96

312401/B

Getting started

5.4 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) 5.4.1 Understanding the ALC The ALC is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. The following illustration shows the layout of the ALC. The different buttons found on the panel are explained below. Figure 43

Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) layout

5.4.2 ALARM group buttons and lamps The ALARM group comprises one lamp, three buttons without lamp. ALARM LAMP

The lamp is blinking red when an alarm has been detected. The lamp is steadily lit when the ACK button has been pressed and the alarm is still active. ACK

When the ACK button is pushed, the alarm will be acknowledge. Two things will happen simultaneously. The alarm buzzer will be silent, and the alarm text will change colour to indicate the acknowledgement. See Alarm text colour on page 28 for more

312401/B

97


information on alarm colours and effects of acknowledge alarms in different images. SOUND OFF

When the sound of button is pushed, the alarm sound will be silent. ALARM VIEW

The alarm view button opens the alarm summary when it is pushed.

5.4.3 PANEL group lamps The PANEL group comprises two lamps. POWER

The lamp is lit green when the panel is on, and the power is OK. FAULT

The lamp is lit red when it has lost contact with the computer, or it is turned off.

5.4.4 COMMAND group buttons and lamps The COMMAND group comprises two buttons with lamps and one button without a lamp. They are used to transfer access and control. This is only used on systems with Power Management System (PMS) and/or Process Control TAKE

Push this button to request access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated GIVE

Push this button to give access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated. STATUS

When the status button is pushed, a window will be opened. The window contains information of for example who has controll/access.

5.4.5 Background light The background light is integrated in the panel film and has yellow colour. The background light intensity can be adjusted from the computer via USB and is implemented locally using PWM.

5.4.6 Buzzer There are three buzzers. All are controlled by the local controller. One of them is, in addition, controlled directly by power. If power is lost, an alarm sounds for at least 60 seconds. The sound

98

312401/B

Getting started

intensity is controlled by the number of buzzers activated, and the intensity setting can be configured. The sounder can be silenced both when power is lost and by the local controller.


312401/B

99


5.5 Using the Input Panel (INP) 5.5.1 Understanding the INP The INP is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. The following illustration shows the layout of the INP. The different buttons found on the panel are explained below. Figure 44

Input Panel (INP) layout

5.5.2 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) The INPUT group comprises 19 buttons. HOME

This button is used to return to the Navigator window. abc...

This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode. Numeric mode is default. Press the button for one second to toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters), and not lit when it is in numeric mode (numbers). The lamp intensity can be adjusted from the computer.

100

312401/B

Getting started

2 / abc

The result of pushing this button depends on which mode the panel is in, numeric or alphanumeric mode. (The same applies for the following buttons: 3/def, 4/ghi, 5/jkl, 6/mno, 7/pqr, 8/tuv, 9/wxyz.) The number, 2, is entered if the button is pushed when the numeric mode is chosen. When alphanumeric mode is selected, the letter, a, will be entered by pushing one time at the button. Pushing two times, the letter, b, is entered. Three pushes enters the letter, c. PAGE UP

This button is used to scroll up in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). PAGE DOWN

This button is used to scroll down in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). ESCAPE

The ESC button is used the same way as an ESC button on a standard keyboard. Most common use is to exit/cancel/stop. For example use the escape button to exit from Tagdetails and return to the alarm history list. BACKSPACE

This button moves the cursor one position backward and deletes this preceding character. (Same function as on a standard keyboard) ENTER

This button is used the same way as the enter button on a standard keyboard. For example use the enter button to confirm a new entered value instead of clicking on the OK softbutton.

5.5.3 Trackball There are a total of seven buttons around the trackball . Three of these buttons are the mouse buttons in front. The other four are located on each side of the trackball . Trackball

This is used for navigation on the screen. Mouse buttons

Same function as an ordinary PC-mouse. Arrow buttons

On each side of the trackball are the arrow buttons. They work like the arrow buttons on a standard alphanumeric keyboard.

312401/B

101


5.5.4 Background light The background light is integrated in the panel film and has yellow colour. The background light intensity can be adjusted from the computer via USB, and the function is implemented in the module using PWM.


102

312401/B

Getting started

5.6 Using the Midi Operator Station 5.6.1 Range of use The Midi Operator Station (MOS) is a specially designed Operator Station that provides easy access to operator functions. It is used as a local or main Operator Station in K-Chief 500 systems and as the bridge display for Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems. Note

The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exact copy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentation depends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.

5.6.2 Understanding the keyboard Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at any time. Other key functions are related to certain menus and can only be applied when the appropriate menu is open. Figure 45

312401/B

MOS keyboard layout

103


Escape

Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in up to five steps by pushing repeatedly. Menu

Turns menus on. The menu displayed will vary with the operational context. Enter

Go to sub-menu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data. Gives access to set-up displays. Page up

Moves the displayed information up a page in the selected group. Used to increase in some displays. Page down

Moves the displayed information down a page in the selected group. Used to decrease in some displays. Sound off

Push to turn audible alarms off. Alarm acknowledge

Push to acknowledge the displayed alarm. Four-way navigator key

Moves a square cursor up/down to select text in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down and to select objects in mimic pictures. Alphanumeric keys (0–9)

Used for insertion of letters and numbers. Push the button repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed. Special characters key

Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push the button repeatedly until the desired character is displayed. Function keys (F1–F4)

The function is specified by the text next to the key (left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoid accidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active the functions keys again. Figure 46

104

Function keys (right) and function (left)

312401/B

Getting started

5.6.3 Understanding the display The Midi Operator Station includes a bright colour flat panel display. The operator interacts with the display through the keyboard. • Window title – Contains the title of the information currently displayed in the main window. • Menu window – Displays the various menus available. • Scroll bar – Indicates how much of the total information in this window is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standard Windows applications). Use page up and page down or the top and bottom of the navigator key. • Alarm window – Displays the last alarm independent of the information displayed in the main window. Figure 47

312401/B

Display layout example

105


Figure 48

Display layout example including graphics

5.6.4 Menus The following menus are available: Main Menu 1 Alarm Menu 2 Tag Selection Menu 3 User Access 4 Configuration Menu 5 Keyboard/Screen The amount of options in the Main Menu vary according to how the User Access settings are sat. Alarm Menu 1 Alarm History 2 Alarm Summary 3 Alarm Group Display 4 Offscan Display Tag Selection Menu 1 Control Menu 2 PMS Menu 3 All tags

106

312401/B

Getting started

User Access Level Active level Commissioning SuperUser User Monitoring

OFF OFF ON OFF

Change Password Configuration Menu 1 Self check 2 Palette Display 3 Clock 4 Favourite Mimics Keyboard and Screen Colour Palette Keyboard Click Key Timeout Keyboard Light Screen Brightness

Day ON Disabled

5.7 Using the Watch Bridge Unit 5.7.1 Explanation of controls and indicators Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available: • The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type, which has a 4 row by 40 characters display, and seven alarm groups. • The LED (Light Emitting Diode) type, which has nineteen alarm groups. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.

312401/B

107


Figure 49

108

Watch Bridge Unit, LCD type

312401/B

Getting started

Figure 50

Watch Bridge Unit, LED type

The main difference between the two types is that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages, whilst the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. • The LCD type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. • For the LED type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. • The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.

5.7.2 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels

312401/B

1

Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST , then SELECT

2

Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.

and use the arrow buttons.

109


Figure 51

Illumination adjustment

5.7.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 1

Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.

2


5.7.4 How to test the panel 1

Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. • If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside the panel.

5.8 Using the Watch Cabin Unit 5.8.1 Explanation of controls and indicators Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available: • The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type, which has a 4 row by 40 characters display and six alarm groups. • The LED (Light Emitting Diode) type, which has seventeen alarm groups. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.

110

312401/B

Getting started

Figure 52

312401/B

Watch Cabin Unit, LCD type

111


Figure 53

Watch Cabin Unit, LED type

The main difference between the two types is that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages, whilst the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. • The LCD type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. • For the LED type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. • The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.

5.8.2 How to respond to alarms When an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarm is indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. Do the following:

112

1

Push SOUND OFF .

2

Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator.

3

Take appropriate action.

4

Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm situation no longer exist.

312401/B

Getting started

5.8.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 1

Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST , then SELECT

2


and use the arrow buttons.

Figure 54

Illumination adjustment

5.8.4 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 1

Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons.

2


5.8.5 How to test the panel 1

Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. • If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent, replace the panel. There are no field serviceable parts inside the panel.

312401/B

113


6 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM 6.1 Overview This chapter contains detailed descriptions of how to operate the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System using the different Operator Stations and panels. It is intended for users already familiar with the “Getting Started” section of this manual. The following subjects are covered: OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 115 OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 180 MOS operational procedures on page 242 Watch Calling system operational procedures on page 252 ShipViewer operational procedures on page 255 ME monitoring operational procedures on page 263

114

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

6.2 OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP) 6.2.1 How to handle alarm events When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place: • The alarm text with time, date and identification is printed. • The alarm indicator on the Control Room Panel starts flashing. • The buzzer in the Control Room Panel is activated. • The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. • External alarm devices, such as engine room horn and rotating light, are activated. Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to handle an alarm: 1

Push the SOUND OFF button on the Control Room Panel (CRP). • This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer.

2

Push the ALARM VIEW button. • The alarm is displayed in red on the screen.

3

Push the ACK button. • This changes the alarm text from red to yellow.

4

Attend to the alarm situation.

Note

The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on the lower right side of the colour graphics display, called the Alarm window.

6.2.2 Navigator name definitions The Navigator is the image which is shown on the Operator Station when the home-button on the Control Room Panel is pushed. It is similar to the image on the Touch Control Panel (TCP). The Navigator image is divided in 2 parts, the Alarm Navigator and the Graphic Display Navigator. This is illustrated

312401/B

115


in figure, Navigator name definitions on page 116. For more information on the Navigator, see Navigator on page 86 and Understanding the TCP on page 95. Figure 55

Navigator name definitions

6.2.3 How alarms are printed after a black-out Loss of ships power

The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Operator Stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separate uninterruptible power supplies. The system will maintain power for 30 minutes after a blackout. Each Distributed Processing Unit timestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. This time stamping is very accurate. All alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected. Loss of power to Operator Stations

The Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information. If the Operator Stations loose power, the system will continue to operate When power is restored to the Operator Stations, all alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected.

6.2.4 How to acknowledge alarms Separate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-, an alarm group- or an alarm summary/alarm history display is active. Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states.

116

312401/B


It is one way to acknowledge alarms, but the result on the screen of the Operator Station will be different depending on which image is displayed at the time the ACK button is pushed. Push the ACK button.

Result of pushing the ACK button when the alarm history image or the alarm summary image is open:

Two things happens simultaneously: • A maximum of three alarms, on the colour graphics display, are acknowledged at the same time. The alarm text turns yellow. And when the alarm condition returns to normal, the text becomes green. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, called the Alarm window, the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. Result of pushing the ACK button when an alarmgroup image is open:

Two things happens simultaneously: • All active alarms shown on the colour graphics display are acknowledged. If there are more unacknowledged alarms in the group push the PAGE DOWN button, or use the scrolling function on the right side of the screen. Push the ACK button to acknowledge the additional alarms. The red alarm text disappear. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, called the , the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. Result of pushing the ACK button when another image which is not mentioned above is open:

• There are no changes on the main colour graphics display image. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display, called the , the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed.

6.2.5 How to display Alarm Summary The alarm summary image shows all active and acknowledged alarms. Alarm Summary on page 118 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm summary image.

312401/B

117


Figure 56

Alarm Summary

Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. It is possible to open the alarm summary in two ways: Method 1:

1

Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM SUMMARY. • A summary of all active and acknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display.

4

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

118

312401/B


Method 2:

1

Push the Alarm view button.

2

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

6.2.6 How to display alarm history The alarm history image shows all alarm events chronological. The newest alarms are displayed on top. Alarm History on page 119 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm history image. Figure 57

Alarm History

Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to display alarm history:

312401/B

119


1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM HISTORY. • A complete chronological list of all alarm events are displayed on the colour graphics display.

4

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm history list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

6.2.7 How to display alarm group information This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following: 1


2

The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen. Use the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup.

3

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

4

120

For more details on one tag, double click on the line with the wanted tag.

312401/B


6.2.8 How to display counters and reset counters This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do the following: 1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: COUNTER DISPLAY. • The system counters are now displayed. • The counter and lap counter value can be changed by using the trackball and the numeric keys.

4

Use the trackball and navigate to the counter or lap counter you want to change. Click on the digit. • A dialogue box like the one underneath is displayed.

5

Type in the wanted value, and click Yes to confirm.

6.2.9 How to display offscan alarms This function is used to view tags which are sat to offscan. The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following: 1


2

312401/B

Use the trackball , point and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

121


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: OFFSCAN TAGS

• Offscan tags are displayed. 4

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used.

6.2.10 How to toggle between group and alarm display Do the following: 1


2


3

Right click anywhere on the screen. • A grey box with the text “Toggle Alarm and group Display” will appear.

4

Right click on the grey box, and the Group Display will be changed to Alarm Display.

6.2.11 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions When the Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar place, it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk or night viewing.

122

312401/B


1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

Monitor Dimmer Functions

The monitor can be adjusted to day palette, dawn palette and night palette. 1

Click on the option button beside the wanted palette. The change is visible at once.

2

To close the window, click on the OK softbutton. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.

It is possible to make changes on the light intensity of the CRP, INP, ALC and TCP, without changing the palette adjustment on the monitor. Just set the wanted monitor palette, and then use the following functions to adjust the light intensity on the panels. Lamp intensity Function

This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Control Room Panel (CRP).

312401/B

123


1

Click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 7 will give the brightest light.

2


Touch Display intensity

This function is used to adjust the light intensity of the TCP. 1

Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 100 % will give the brightest light.

2


Backlight intensity

This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Input Panel (INP) and the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). 1


2


6.2.12 Screen Saver On the Operator Station the screen saver can be turned on/off, and the time delay before the screen saver is turned on can be adjusted. 1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

124

312401/B


4

Click on the check box which activates the Screen Saver function.

5

Type in the number of minutes the screen shall be active before the screen saver turns it self on.

6


6.2.13 How to save screen dump The K-Chief 500 has a screen dump function which makes it possible to save the image on the screen. Follow the description in this chapter to make a screen dump. 1

At the lower, left part of the screen is a icon illustrating a floppy disk. Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on this icon. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

312401/B

125


2

Click on the save softbutton if the suggested file name is agreeable. If not, use the alphanumeric mode on the CRP and write in the wanted file name before clicking on the save softbutton. • The screen dump is now saved.

6.2.14 How to customise the Favourites The main group called Favourites can be customised by the operator. There can be up to 9 thumbnails in this group. 1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the sofftbutton: MENY. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

3

126

Click on the text : Clear HISTORY..

312401/B


4

Choose your favourite thumbnails just by clicking once on them. (Choose a maximum of 9 thumbnails.) The first you click on will be located at the lower right corner of the Navigator when the main group, Favorites, are displayed.

5

Click once more on the MENY softbutton. • The same window, like the one in item 2, will appear.

6

This time, click on the text Copy HISTORY to FAVORITES. • The operator’s favourite thumbnails are now saved in the main group, Favorites.

6.2.15 How to print Miscellaneous Logs An Operator Station can only be connected to one printer. This printer will have a defined function, either as an alarm printer or a log printer. If it is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both functions. Note

A Selected Points log can only be printed from the Operator Station fitted to do so. The Miscellaneous Logs consists of 11 standard logs and 6 logs which can be chosen. See the list of logs underneath. List of the Miscellaneous Logs

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

312401/B

Alarm Summary Log (standard) Alarm History Log (standard) Offscan tags Log (standard) Inhibited tags Log (standard) Alarm Log (standard) Group Log (standard) Selected points Log (standard) Autolog (standard) Noonlog (standard) Complete Log (standard) Event Log (standard) Counters Log (option) Tank Log (option) Level & Draft Correction Log (option) API Log (option)

127


• Ullage Log (option) • Custom Log (option) Most of the logs in the list above can be printed by following the procedure underneath. Except from the Selected Points log, Auto log and Noon log which needs to be configurated before printing. The printing procedure for the Event Log, Alarm History Log and Group Log has some minor differences in the procedure. Note

The tags in Autolog and Noonlog must be configured before they can be printed. See How to configure the Autolog on page 135, and How to configure the Noonlog on page 136. Note

Before printing a Selected Points Log, the Selected Points groups must be configured with the wanted tags. See How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 133. Note

To configure an Event Log before printing see How to configure the Event Log on page 132. How to print: Alarm Summary Log , Inhibited tags log, Alarm log, Complete log, Counters log, Tank Log, Level & Draft Correction Log, API Log, Ullage Log and Custom Log

1


2

3

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS

• A window similar to the one underneath appears.

128

312401/B


4

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm Summary Log)

5

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. • The printing of the chosen log will start. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete.

How to print: Alarm History Log, Event Log and Group Log

1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS


312401/B

129


4

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm History Log)

See Alarm History Log on page 130, Event Log on page 131 and Group Log on page 131 for an illustration of which window is opened for the three different logs. Figure 58

130

Alarm History Log

312401/B


312401/B

Figure 59

Event Log

Figure 60

Group Log

131


5

For the Alarm History Log and the Event Log choose to print the whole log or select a time span. For the Group Log select the wanted group. And click OK.

6


Note

Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval set for printing of Selected Points log.

6.2.16 How to configure the Event Log The Event Log may be printed out or displayed on the screen. See Where to find the Event Log display on page 137 for more information. Tags must be configured in Tag details to be displayed and/or printed in the Event Log. If they are not, the Event Log will only display certain events like: an operator action changing the process parameters or a change in state of the process. 1

Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Eventlog. • A window appears with a request for a password.

3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Event Log.

132

4

Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.

5

Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.

312401/B


6.2.17 How to configure your own Selected Points group The system allows you to create up to 5 Selected Points groups. Each group can include up to 20 selected tags. The tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the following: 1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP

• A window similar to the one shown here will appear.

4

To choose a group to configure tags in, use the trackball , point and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.

312401/B

133


5

Select group by using the drop-down combo box at the upper,

right side of the window.

• A list of the tags in the chosen group will appear. 6

Select the wanted tags by clicking on the tag, and then click on the softbutton,Add. The tag can also be selected by just double clicking on the tag. • The selected tag will then be shown on the left side.

7

When you have selected all the wanted tags, click OK. • Do the same procedure again to configure the other Selected Points groups.

6.2.18 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group The list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Just remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per group. 1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP


4

Choose the group you want to make changes in by using the trackball , point, and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.

134

312401/B


5

The tags which are in the Selected Points group will be shown on the left side. Click on the tag you want to remove, and click on the softbutton, Remove. • To add a tag, see How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 133, from point 5 to 7.

6

When you have renewed all the wanted tags in the Selected Points group, click OK. • If tags in the other Selected Points groups shall be changed, do this same procedure again .

6.2.19 How to configure the Autolog 1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Auto Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.

312401/B

135


3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Autolog.

4


5


6.2.20 How to configure the Noonlog 1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Noon Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.

3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Noonlog.

136

4


5


312401/B


6.2.21 Where to find the Event Log display 1


2

3

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: EVENTLOG

• The events are displayed in form of a list.

6.2.22 How to display system information This function is used to display various type of system information such as ship and station information, software version, functions, limited access override etc. It also allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters. 1


2

3

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY

• A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

312401/B

137


6.2.23 Access control system The Limited Access Override softbutton-group is an access control system based on the use of passwords. The system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The Limited Access Override softbutton-group consists of : Acknowledge, Mimics, Commissioning, Superuser and Password. Note

Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Acknowledge

This function is used to allow alarms to be received and acknowledged on Operator Stations that normally would not receive them. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. To activate and deactivate this function, do the following:

138

312401/B


1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY

• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Acknowledge.

5

Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Acknowledge, will now say Acknowledge off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

312401/B

If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Acknowledge off softbutton.

139


Note

When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Acknowledge off

Mimic

This function allows system control through the mimic pictures. It is used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally do not have access to. 1


2


3



140

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Mimics.

312401/B


5

Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Mimics, will now say Mimics off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Mimics off softbutton.

Note

When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Mimics off.

Commissioning

This function allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. 1


2

3


• The System Information Display window will now be opened.

312401/B

141


4

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Commissioning.

5

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Commissioning, will now say Commissioning off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE COM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Commissioning off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note

Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.

Superuser

This function makes it possible to change alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. 1


2

142


312401/B


3



To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Superuser.

5

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Superuser, will now say Superuser off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE SUP is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Superuser off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note


312401/B

143


Password

1


2

3



To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Password.

5

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Password, will now say Password off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE KEY is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Password off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note


144

312401/B


6.2.24 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information This procedure display all parameters for each tag such as values, alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following: 1

Open the SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY. The procedure can be found in How to display system information on page 137.

2

At the upper right side on the System Information Display window, is a box with the text, Unit Display, beside it. Fill in the number of the wanted Distributed Processing Unit in this box.

3

Click on the Unit Display softbutton, or push the enter button. • The information on the selected Distributed Processing Unit will now be shown.

6.2.25 How to change time zone This function is used to change time zone when sailing eastwards or westwards. 1


2

3 4

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM

INFO DISPLAY.

Click on the softbutton called, Set, under the text Timezone. • A window appears with a request for a password.

312401/B

145


5

Fill in the password. And click OK. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.

6

Choose the time zone by using the drop-down combo box.

7

Click OK.

Note

If the system is fitted with a master clock, all time changes must be made in the master clock.

6.2.26 How to change system time Note

Use the “change time zone” function above when going between different time zones. The K-Chief 500 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here. 1


2

3 4

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM

INFO DISPLAY.

Click on the softbutton called: Set System Time. • A window appears with a request for a password.

146

312401/B


5


6

Use the drop-down combo boxes and select date and time. Then click on the OK softbutton. • The new date and time is transferred to the other Operator Stations in the network if the Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.

Note


6.2.27 Info field This function is only for use by Kongsberg Maritime.

6.2.28 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Operator Stations which would not normally allow it. See Acknowledge on page 138 for more details.

6.2.29 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Operator Stations which normally would not allow it. See Mimic on page 140 for more details.

312401/B

147


6.2.30 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer 1


2


3



Click on the softbutton called: Disable CRP buzzer. • A window appears with a request for a password.

5

Fill in the password.

6

Click on the OK softbutton. • The CRP buzzer is now disabled. • The text on the softbutton changes to Enable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed.

To activate the buzzer again, do the following: 1

Open the System Information Display if it is not already open.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the Enable OCP buzzer softbutton • The CRP buzzer is now active. • The text on the softbutton changes to Disable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will disappear.

6.2.31 How to change tag parameters for a channel This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. Do the following:

148

312401/B


1


2


3

Double click on the line with the wanted tag. • Tag Details for that tag will be displayed.

4

Double click on the parameter you want to change.

5

A window appears with a request for a password.

6

Fill in the password and click on the Ok softbutton. • The parameter can now be changed to the wanted value. • The display picture is updated, and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Operator Station in the system.

Tag Details image on page 149 gives an illustration of a Tag Details image. Figure 61

312401/B

Tag Details image

149


There are three softbuttons on the bottom of the tag details window. It is Tag Details, Advanced Tag Details and Tag Application. The following information is displayed by clicking on them: Tag Details

Shows the normal tag details display. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Enable, stops checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Disable, starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Value, allows you to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor. Advanced Tag Details

Shows a full list of all tag details. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of displayed parameters. Tag Application

Lists other tags related to this tag. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. The following two tables explains what the different parameters for analogue and digital input tags are used for: Analogue input channel parameters Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No

Unique code describing a tag

Tag number

Number

No

Unique number describing a tag

Description

Text

Yes

Description of a tag

Function

Text

No

Short code describing the function of the tag

Value

Number

No

Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered

Distributed Processing Unit number

Number

No

Unique number of the node

Channel number

Number

No

Number of the channel connected

Channel type

Number

No

Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled

Type

Text

No

Analog/Digital

Control Room Panel alarm group

Number

Yes

All tags in the system are divided into different groups

Bridge group

Number

Yes

All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups

150

312401/B


Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Autolog

Number

Yes

Included in the autolog list

Noonlog

Number

Yes

Included in the noonlog list

Eventlog

Number

Yes

Included in the eventlog list

Offscan

Number

Yes

Included in the offscan log list

Offscan value

Number

Yes


Inhibited by tag

Text

No

Tag to inhibit this channel

Access group

Number

Yes

Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm

Limit Alarm Low Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High High

Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes

Time in 100 milliseconds

Dynamic Dead Band

Number

Yes

Report value dead band limit

Counts Low

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng. Units Low

Number

Yes

Instrument minimum value

Eng. Units High

Number

Yes

Instrument maximum value

Alarm On-Delay1

Number

Yes

High/Low delay in 1 second

Alarm Off-Delay1

Number

Yes


Alarm On-Delay2

Number

Yes

HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second

Alarm Off-Delay1

Number

Yes


Inhibit On-Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay in 1 second

Inhibit Off-Delay

Number

Yes


Digital input channel parameters Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No


Description

Text

No


Function

Text

No


State

Text

No

Input status after time delay

312401/B

151


Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function


Number

No


Channel number

Number

No


Channel type

Number

No


Type

Text

No

Analog/Digital


Number

Yes


Bridge group

Number

Yes


Autolog

Number

Yes


Noonlog

Number

Yes


Eventlog

Number

Yes


Offscan

Number

Yes


Inhibited by tag

Text

No


Access group

Number

Yes


Enable Event on Open

Yes/No

Yes

Enable/disable event

Enable Event on Closed

Yes/No

Yes


Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes


Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes


Al.Inhibit Src TagNo

Text

No

Refer to another Tag or Channel

Alarm On Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Alarm Off Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

On Delay

Number

Yes

Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second

Off Delay

Number

Yes


Invert input

Yes/No

Yes

Invert input status

6.2.32 How to change Deviation parameters How to change limits.

This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking, and deviation from the corrected value. For instance used for main engine exhaust gas temperature.

152

312401/B


1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C

• The new image on the screen will look like the figure underneath, A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display on page 153. Figure 62

A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display

4

Click on the limit you want to change. • A window is opened.

312401/B

5

Type in the new wanted value.

6

Click Ok.

153


Use this procedure to change any value on this display. Note

When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked. How to make profile

The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways, automatic correction and manual correction. Automatic correction

1


2


3


4

Click on the text which says: AUTO. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.

5

Push the enter button. • All values found for Current deviation are moved to Correction, and Current deviation should read 0 for all cylinders.

Manual correction

1


2


3


154

312401/B


4

Click on the text which says: MAN. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.

5

Use the trackball , point, and click to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. • The value for each cylinder under Current deviation should read 0. • For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to chapter Exhaust mean value tag items on page 397.

6.2.33 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration Do the following procedure to get access to the Watch Calling Configuration: 1


2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: WATCHCALLING CONFIG.

6.2.34 How to set the On Duty engineer Note

In order to set On duty engineer, the system must be in control watch. 1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.

312401/B

155


3

If for example the 2nd engineer shall be sat on duty, use the trackball , point, and click on the thumbnail which says, 2ND ENG ON DUTY. • A indicator beside the officers title on the Watch Calling Units are lit. • Down in the left corner of the OS screen, the , a text with who is on duty is displayed.

4

To take the officer off duty again, click on the same thumbnail again.

6.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location Note

This procedure requires that an engineer is sat to on duty. Refer to chapter How to set the On Duty engineer on page 155. The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. Use the following procedure to change Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following ways: On the Operator Station:

1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.

3

Click on the softbutton for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH). • When the watch responsibility has been accepted, the status will be shown at the function window on the Operator Station.

156

312401/B


On the Watch Bridge Unit:

1

Push the button for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH buttons). • The indicator for the new location will flash and make a sound until it is accepted at that location. • The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location will be switched off (no longer lit).

6.2.36 How to call officers From the Operator Station you can call the different officers and engineers. Which officer and/or engineer you can call depends on the system configuration. The calling can be done by the following methods: Using the Operator Station:

The softbuttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1


2

Use the trackball , point and click on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. (To illustrate this procedure the WCALL ENGINE main group is used as an example.) • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. The image underneath is an illustration of how it may look like.

312401/B

157


3

Click on one of the thumbnail which says CALL DUTY ENG or CALL ALL ENG (depending on who you want to call). • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.

4

To cancel the call, just click on the same thumbnail again.


The buttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1

Push the CALL DUTY ENG button or the CALL ALL ENG button on the Watch Bridge Unit (depending on who you want to call). • The call indicator will be lit. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.

2

158

To cancel the call, push the same button again.

312401/B


6.2.37 How to change the engineer qualifications When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to be updated. (The following example shows a qualification change for the Chief engineer:) 1

To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter on page .

2

Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP, and page 2 will appear.

3

Click on the qualification text beside the officer who are being replaced. • A similar window opens:

4

The different qualifications equals a number. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted qualification.

5

Click on the OK softbutton. • The new qualification has now been set. And the text has changed to the selected qualification.

6.2.38 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode When an engineer/officer or a group of engineers/officers are on duty, the Watch Bridge unit and Watch Cabin units are set to On Duty mode. When an engineer is Off Duty his or her’s panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive. What is Off Duty active

The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display the alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. What is Off Duty passive

312401/B

159


The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the buttons on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark). 1

To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter on page .

2


3

Click on the mode text beside the officer it concern. (In this example, the Chief engineer is being replaced.) • A similar window opens:

4

The different modes equals a number. 1 is active and 0 is passive. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted mode.

5

Click on the OK softbutton. • The new mode has now been sat. And the text has changed.

6.2.39 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as “belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels in his’ or her’s cabin and in public areas. When an engineer is On duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system. Note

This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station.

160

312401/B


Each panel has a unique serial number. The panels can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and the public areas. For example, all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be activated when the Chief Engineer is on duty. 1


2

3

Use the trackball , point, and click on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE . The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY

4

Use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton called:Watchcalling Configuration.

5

Click on the officer whose panel is being assigned to someone else. (In this example, the 3rd engineer’s panel is being assigned to someone else) • A similar window to this is opened:

• On the right side of the screen, there is a definition of the groups. It may look like this:

312401/B

161


6

Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted officer to assign the panel to.

7

Click on the OK softbutton.

6.2.40 How to make your own short trend display Introduction to short trend

The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. To display the data you can use the trend display. The trend display contains a graph selector panel where you can select between up to 8 different graph views. Each graph view can have up to 8 plots. You can select any tag for plot presentation. You will also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. When the desired tags are selected, you can select an hour in the time-line panel to plot the corresponding data. If you select the current hour, the system will continue to add changes to the graph upon changes in the tags. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. A preserve hour facility will save all tag data for a selected hour for later reference.

162

312401/B


Figure 63

The short trend display

How to make your own short trend display

Do the following: 1

Push the HOME button at the control panel. • This button opens the Navigator image.

2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SHORT TREND

312401/B

4

Select a graph by selecting one of the eight radio buttons in the graph selector panel.

5

Right click on one of the empty plot labels and select SELECT TAG in the pop-up menu. The SELECT TAG DIALOGUE will pop up.

6

Select a tag in the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. If desired, use the filter to reduce the number of tags shown.

7

Press OK to exit the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE.

163


8

Repeat step 5 to 7 to add more tags.

9

Click on an hour in the time-line panel to plot the data.

If more than one tag shall be selected for plotting, there is an alternative way of doing this. In the upper part of the dialogue box is a check box with this text beside it: Automatically select the next plot when a tag is selected. Use the trackball and click in this check box. When this function is activated you can directly select the next tag you want to plot in the same diagram. Step 8 in the procedure above says to repeat step 5 to 8. But with this function activated you just repeat step 6 and click on the OK softbutton to add more tags in the diagram. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display on page 228. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 175. How to select time in the trend display

The time-line panel present the last 24 hours with the current hour at the right end. If an hour is selected, the corresponding files are read from the hard disk. If the user selects current hour, the data is retrieved from the logging server instead, and the trend is continuously updating additional changes to the tags. Every new hour the labels are shifted one position to the left. Figure 64

The time-line at 16 hours with the 07 hour selected

Figure 65 selected

The time-line at 16 hours with the current hour

Do the following to select an hour:

164

1

Position the cursor by using the trackball slightly to the right of the desired hour.

2

Left-click.

3

Observe that the selected hour is marked and that the corresponding data is plotted in the graph.

312401/B


Note

The selected hour can also be changed by using the left and right arrow keys. How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display

Each plot has its own y-axis. This makes it possible to manipulate them individually to make a more readable graph picture. You can zoom and pan a single plot or several plots at a time. Do the following to change a plot’s y-axis: 1 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the plot’s y-axis. Note that the axis label’s font is changed to BOLD. 2 Select the axis by clicking on it. • The axis labels background colour is changed to black to indicate that the axis is selected for y-axis manipulation. • When one axis or more is selected the y-axis control is displayed in the upper left corner of the plot area. Figure 66

Y-axis zoom and pan control

3 4

Repeat step 1 and 2 to add other axes. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as follows: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • In: Zoom in • Out: Zoom out • Auto: Set the axis to display the complete plot in 95% of the plot area • Set: Manually key in the minimum and maximum values • X: Deselects all selected axes and hide the y-axis control The arrow keys around the trackball can also be used to change the selected y-axis: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • Left: Zoom in • Right: Zoom out 5 Repeat step 1 and 2 on already selected plots to deselect an axis. It is also possible to select all the y-axis:

312401/B

165


1

Click on the MENU softbutton.

2

A context menu is opend.

3

Select Y-Scale, by clicking on the text.

4

Select Select all plots, by clicking on the text.

5

To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as described in the list above.

How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display

The graph includes one x-axis for all plots. Use the functions of the x-axis zoom and pan control to zoom and pan the x-axis. Figure 67

X-axis zoom and pan control

Click the buttons as follows to change the graph’s x-axis: Pan the graph to the left Pan the graph to the right Zoom out Zoom in The selected point in time will be illustrated in the time display to the right. In the sample below the graph is set to display the time between 10:35 and 10:40 approximately. Figure 68

Time display

How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display

It is possible to switch on and off a function whereby the plot’s actual position is marked with a small square. When the cursor is positioned over one of the points, a tool-tip box will pop-up displaying the point’s time stamp and actual value.

166

312401/B


Figure 69

Plot point value

Do the following to enable the display of plot points: 1

Position the cursor by using the trackball on the menu softbutton.

2

Right click to open the context menu.

3

Select View, by clicking on the text.

4

Select Points, to enable or disable displaying of plot points.

How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor

It is possible to switch on and off a cursor in the graph area. By positioning the cursor in x horizontally, the plot’s corresponding value is displayed in the plot label. A tool-tip with exact time information is also generated. Do the following to switch the cursor on:

312401/B

1

Right click in the plot area to open the context menu.

2

Select Show cursor. The cursor will be displayed and the graph label will indicate the cursor’s time position.

167


Figure 70

3

Cursor’s time position

Move the cursor to read values for other points: a

Move the cursor near the vertical cursor.

b

Click and hold the left button while moving the cursor horizontally.

c

Release the left button.

The values are now updated. How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display

It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the x-axis on and off. Figure 71

Display of x-axis grid-lines

Do the following to enable the display of x grid-lines:

168

1

Position the cursor on the menu softbutton, by using the trackball .

2


312401/B


3


4

Select Gridlines X-Axis to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines.

How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display

It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the y-axis on and off. The grid-line is connected to the plot’s y-axis and will have the same colour. Only grid-lines for one y-axis may be visible simultaneously. Figure 72

312401/B

Display of y-axis grid-lines

1

Position the cursor on a plot label, by using the trackball .

2


169


3

Select Show grid lines to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines for the selected plot.

4

Repeat step 1 to 3 on another plot to enable grid-lines for the selected plot.

How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display

A function called Fill-to-base enables the plot to colour the area between a pre-defined value and the plot value, with a colour derived from the plot colour. Figure 73

Fill-to-base function

The picture above shows the difference between a filled plot and a plot not. Do the following to enable the fill function for a plot: 1


2


3

Select Fill to base to enable or disable the fill function. The base value is set to zero by default, but it may be changed by selecting the menu item Set base.

How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display

The plot may be drawn in a digital or interpolated mode. Digital, means that the line is drawn between the points only by use of vertical and horizontal lines. This mode is best suited for digital values.

170

312401/B


In the ‘interpolated’ mode, the line is drawn as a straight line between the points assuming that the value has changed gradually rather than jumped to the new value. This mode is best suited for analogue type of values. Figure 74

Digital and interpolated mode

Do the following to switch between the two modes: 1

Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want to change.

2


3

Select Interpolate to enable or disable the interpolation mode.

How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display

You can add an annotation to each plot in a graph. An annotation is a mark that can be positioned on the plot to mark a point of special interest.

312401/B

171


Figure 75

Annotation

Do the following to add an annotation: 1

Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want.

2


3

Select Annotation to enable or disable the annotation. The Annotation symbol is shown in the plot label.

4

Drag and drop the Annotation symbol to the desired position on the graph.

How to remove a plot in the trend display

Do the following to remove a plot:

172

1


2


312401/B


3

Select Remove to remove the plot.

How to save an image to the image repository

It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. The images in the repository can be viewed by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to save an image of a graph: 1 Select the graph that you want to save a snapshot of. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the Meny softbutton. 3 Left click to open the menu.

4

Select Save image to make a snapshot of the currently selected graph.

How to display an image in the image repository

It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. You can view saved snapshots by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to view an image in the image repository: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor between on the Meny softbutton. 2 Left click to open the menu.

312401/B

173


3

Select Image Viewer to display the Image Viewer. Figure 76

4 5

Image Viewer

To display it, select a thumbnail in the list view on the left side. Select a graph view in the graph selector panel to exit the image viewer.

How to preserve an hour in the trend display

It is possible to preserve an hour for later reference. This function makes a copy of the stored data for the currently selected hour. Up to 10 data sets can be preserved. When 10 data sets are stored and the function is executed once more, the oldest data set is deleted. The data is named using the format YYMMDD_HH where YY denominates year, MM month, DD day and HH hour. Do the following to preserve an hour: 1 Select the hour you want to preserve in the time-line panel. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. 3 Right click on the Menu softbutton.

174

312401/B


4

Select Preserve hour to preserve the currently selected hour.

How to load an preserved hour in the trend display

It is possible to display data from preserved hours instead of the available 24 hours log. Do the following to load a preserved hour: 1

Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon.

2

Click on the Menu softbutton.

3

Select Load preserve hour to open the Preserved hours sub-menu.

4

Load one of the preserved hours by clicking on it. • The data for the hour is loaded and displayed.

How to preserve trend display settings manually

The trends display settings are normally saved automatically. This will make sure that your plot settings remain the same after a system restart. If you want to change the settings without saving your changes, it is possible to switch off the automatic saving, and save and load the display settings manually. Do the following to switch off the automatic saving:

312401/B

1


2

Right click on the Menu softbutton.

175


3

Select Save automatically.

4

Select Save.

If you want to reload the setting again, press Load. If you want to remove all plots and plot settings in the graph, select Clear all.

6.2.41 How to make your own long trend display Introduction to long trend

The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. In addition, it is possible to configure up to 100 tags for long time trending. The logging interval may be set for each tag individually, ranging from 1 minute (giving 5 days) to 20 minutes (giving 100 days). To display the data, the long trend display is used. The long trend display contains a graph selector panel, where you can select between up to eight different graph views. Each graph view can have up to eight plots. You can select any of the configured tags for plot presentation. You may also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference.

176

312401/B


Figure 77

The long trend display

How to operate the long trend display

The operation of the long trend display is nearly identical to operating the short trend display. Refer to the following issues in the short trend display chapter for further reference: How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display on page 166 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor on page 167 How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 168 How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 169 How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display on page 170 How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display on page 170 How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display on page 171

312401/B

177


How to remove a plot in the trend display on page 172 How to save an image to the image repository on page 173 How to configure a long trend

Do the following to configure a long trend 1

Push the Home button. • This button opens the Navigator image.

2


3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: LONG TREND

178

4

Click on the Menu softbutton, to open the dialogue box below.

5

Select Long trend setup from the menu.

312401/B


6

Find and select a tag in the Available tags panel. Use filters as desired.

7

Click Add to add the tag to Configured tags for long trend.

8

Repeat step 6 and 7 to add more tags.

9

Click in the Sampling interval / duration field to change the logging interval.

10 To remove an entry from logging, select the tag in the Configured tags for long trend grid, and press Delete. Please note that it will take some time before changes to the configuration is visible in the display. If tags are removed all the logged data for all tags below the removed tags will be cleared. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display on page 166. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 175. How to load logged data in the long trend display

Every hour new data is added to the log files on disk by the log server. To view the updated data you can select Menu→Load.

If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. It is also possible to get the trend display to automatically load the updated data every 1 hour. Select the Load every hour to activate this function. Please be aware that if this function is activated, it may interrupt your system at an inconvenient point in time and it may take a few seconds to load the data. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. Click on this button to reload the data.

312401/B

179


6.3 OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) The image on the Touch Control Panel (TCP) is called the Navigator. To operate the TCP a finger is normally used, but a stylus similar to a fingertip is also a possibility. The TCP screen is divided in 2 parts, like the Navigator image. The Alarm Navigator is on the left side and the Graphic Display Navigator is on the right. See illustration, Navigator name definitions on page 180. Figure 78

Navigator name definitions

Note

The buttons on the Control Room Panel (CRP) are used to handle alarm events, please see How to handle alarm events on page 115,How to acknowledge alarms on page 116 ,and How alarms are printed after a black-out on page 116, for more information.

6.3.1 How to lock and unlock the Touch Control Panel The Touch Control Panel can be locked. When the TCP is locked, the only active part of the TCP is the Meny softbutton.

180

312401/B


Lock the TCP:

1

Touch the Meny softbutton on the Touch Control Panel. It is located under the main groups, and on the right side of the thumbnails. • A window similar to the on shown here is displayed:

2

Touch the Lock Touch Control Panel text. • A message window like the one underneath will appear on the TCP:

• The TCP is now locked. Unlock the TCP:

1

Touch the Meny softbutton on the Touch Control Panel. It is located under the main groups, and on the right side of the thumbnails. • A message window like the one underneath will appear on the TCP:

312401/B

181


2

Touch the Lock Touch Control Panel text. • The TCP is now unlocked.

6.3.2 How to display Alarm Summary The alarm summary image displays all active and acknowledged alarms. Alarm Summary on page 182 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm summary image. Figure 79

Alarm Summary

Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to display alarm summary:

182

312401/B


1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM SUMMARY. • A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display.

3

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons (on the CRP) to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

6.3.3 How to display alarm history The alarm history image displays all alarm events chronological. The newest alarms are displayed on top. Alarm History on page 183 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm history image. Figure 80

Alarm History

Do the following to display alarm history:

312401/B

183


1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM HISTORY.

3

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm history list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

6.3.4 How to display alarm group information This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. Do the following: 1

The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup.

2

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm list can also be used. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

3

For more details on one tag, double click on the line with the wanted tag.

6.3.5 How to display counters and reset counters This function is used to view running hours for pumps, main engine, accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Do the following:

184

312401/B


1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: COUNTER DISPLAY. • The system counters are now displayed. • The counter and lap counter value can be changed by using the trackball and the numeric keys.

3

Use the trackball and navigate to the counter or lap counter you want to change. Click on the digit. • A dialogue box like the one underneath is displayed.

4

Type in the wanted value, and click Yes to confirm.

6.3.6 How to display offscan alarms This function is used to view tags which are sat to offscan. The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. Do the following: 1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: OFFSCAN TAGS

• Offscan tags are displayed. 3

312401/B

Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used.

185


6.3.7 How to toggle between group and alarm display Do the following: 1


2

Use the trackball and right click anywhere on the screen. • A grey box with the text “Toggle Alarm and group Display” will appear.

3

Right click on the grey box, and the Group Display will be changed to Alarm Display.

6.3.8 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions When the Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar place, it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day, dusk or night viewing. 1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

186

312401/B


Monitor Dimmer Functions

The monitor can be adjusted to day palette, dawn palette and night palette. The TCP is simultaneously adjusted when this function is used. 1

Use the trackball and click on the option button beside the wanted palette. The change is visible at once.

2


It is possible to make changes on the light intensity of the CRP, INP, ALC and TCP, without changing the palette adjustment on the monitor. Just set the wanted monitor palette, and then use the following functions to adjust the light intensity on the panels. Lamp intensity Function

This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Control Room Panel (CRP). 1

Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box, and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. • 7 will give the brightest light.

2


Touch Display intensity

This function is used to adjust the light intensity of the TCP.

312401/B

187


1


2


Backlight intensity

This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Input Panel (INP) and the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). 1


2


6.3.9 Screen saver On Operator Station the screen saver can be turned on/off, and the time delay before the screen saver is turned on can be adjusted. 1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

188

312401/B


3

Use the trackball and click on the check box which activates the Screen Saver function.

4

Fill in the number of minutes the screen shall be active before the screen saver turns it self on.

5


6.3.10 How to save screen dump The K-Chief 500 has a screen dump function which makes it possible to save the image on the screen. Follow the description in this chapter to make a screen dump. 1

At the lower, left part of the screen is a icon illustrating a floppy disk. Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on this icon. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

2

Click on the save softbutton if the suggested file name is agreeable. If not, use the alphanumeric mode on the CRP and write in the wanted file name before clicking on the save softbutton. • The screen dump is now saved.

312401/B

189


6.3.11 How to customise the Favourites The main group called Favourites can be customised by the operator. There can be up to 9 thumbnails in this group. 1

Use the fingertip and touch the softbutton called: MENY, on the TCP. • A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

2

Touch the text : Clear HISTORY..

3

Choose your favourite thumbnails just by touching once on them. (Choose a maximum of 9 thumbnails.) The first you touch will be located at the lower right corner of the Navigator when the main group, Favorites, are displayed.

4

Touch once more on the MENY softbutton. • The same window, like the one in item 2, will appear.

5

This time, touch on the text Copy HISTORY to FAVORITES. • The operator’s favourite thumbnails are now saved in the main group, Favorites.

6.3.12 How to print Miscellaneous Logs An Operator Station can only be connected to one printer. This printer will have a defined function, either as an alarm printer or a log printer. If it is only one printer in the system, the printer will serve both functions. Note

A Selected Points log can only be printed from the Operator Station fitted to do so. The Miscellaneous Logs consists of 11 standard logs and 6 logs which can be chosen. See the list of logs underneath. List of the Miscellaneous Logs

• Alarm Summary Log (standard)

190

312401/B


• Alarm History Log (standard) • Offscan tags Log (standard) • Inhibited tags Log (standard) • Alarm Log (standard) • Group Log (standard) • Selected points Log (standard) • Autolog (standard) • Noonlog (standard) • Complete Log (standard) • Event Log (standard) • Counters Log (option) • Tank Log (option) • Level & Draft Correction Log (option) • API Log (option) • Ullage Log (option) • Custom Log (option) Most of the logs in the list above can be printed by following the procedure underneath. Except from the Selected Points log, Auto log and Noon log which needs to be configurated before printing. The printing procedure for the Event Log, Alarm History Log and Group Log has some minor differences in the procedure. Note

The tags in Autolog and Noonlog must be configured before they can be printed. See How to configure the Autolog on page 199, and How to configure the Noonlog on page 199. Note

Before printing a selected Points Log, the Selected Points groups must be configured with the wanted tags. See How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 196. Note

To configure an Event Log before printing see How to configure the Event Log on page 195.

312401/B

191


How to print: Alarm Summary Log , Inhibited tags log, Alarm log, Complete log, Counters log, Tank Log, Level & Draft Correction Log, API Log, Ullage Log and Custom Log

1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called:MISC LOGS • A window similar to the one underneath appears.

3

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm Summary Log)

4


192

312401/B


How to print: Alarm History Log, Event Log and Group Log

1

2

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS


3

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the log you want to print. (For example, the Alarm History Log)

See Alarm History Log on page 195, Event Log on page 195and Group Log on page 195 for an illustration of which window is opened for the three different logs.

312401/B

193


194

Figure 81

Alarm History Log

Figure 82

Event Log

312401/B


Figure 83

Group Log

4

For the Alarm History Log and the Event Log choose to print the whole log or select a time span. For the Group Log select the wanted group. And click OK.

5


Note

Printing a Selected Points log on demand, will clear the interval set for printing of Selected Points log.

6.3.13 How to configure the Event Log The Event Log may be printed out or displayed on the screen. See Where to find the Event Log display on page 200 for more information. Tags must be configured in Tag details to be displayed and/or printed in the Event Log. If they are not, the Event Log will only display certain events like: an operator action changing the process parameters or a change in state of the process.

312401/B

195


1

Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Eventlog. • A window appears with a request for a password.

3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Event Log.

4


5


6.3.14 How to configure your own Selected Points group The system allows you to create up to 5 Selected Points groups. Each group can include up to 20 selected tags. The tags can be combined from different alarm groups. Do the following: 1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP


196

312401/B


3

To choose a group to configure tags in, use the trackball , point and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.

4

Select group by using the drop-down combo box at the upper,

right side of the window.

• A list of the tags in the chosen group will appear. 5

Select the wanted tags by clicking on the tag, and then click on the softbutton,Add. The tag can also be selected by just double clicking on the tag. • The selected tag will then be shown on the left side.

6

When you have selected all the wanted tags, click OK. • Do the same procedure again to configure the other Selected Points groups.

6.3.15 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group The list of selected tags can be modified at any time. Just remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per group. 1

2

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP


312401/B

197


3

Choose the group you want to make changes in by using the trackball , point, and click on one of the option buttons. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown.

4

The tags which are in the Selected Points group will be shown on the left side. Click on the tag you want to remove, and click on the softbutton, Remove. • To add a tag, see How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 196, from point 5 to 7.

5

When you have renewed all the wanted tags in the Selected Points group, click OK. • If tags in the other Selected Points groups shall be changed, do this same procedure again .

198

312401/B


6.3.16 How to configure the Autolog 1

Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Use the CRP and double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Auto Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.

3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Autolog.

4


5


6.3.17 How to configure the Noonlog 1

Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Use the CRP and double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Noon Log. • A window appears with a request for a password.

312401/B

199


3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Noonlog.

4


5


6.3.18 Where to find the Event Log display 1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: EVENTLOG • The events are displayed in form of a list.

6.3.19 How to display system information This function is used to display various type of system information such as ship and station information, software version, functions, limited access override etc. It also allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters. 1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. POINTS DISP

• A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

200

312401/B


6.3.20 Access control system The Limited Access Override softbutton-group is an access control system based on the use of passwords. The system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The Limited Access Override softbutton-group consists of : Acknowledge, Mimics, Commissioning, Superuser and Password. Note

Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Acknowledge

This function is used to allow alarms to be received and acknowledged on Operator Stations that normally would not receive them. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. To activate and deactivate this function, do the following:

312401/B

201


1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.

3

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Acknowledge.

4

Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Acknowledge, will now say Acknowledge off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

5

If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Acknowledge off softbutton.

Note

When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Acknowledge off

202

312401/B


Mimic

This function allows system control through the mimic pictures. It is used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally don’t have access to. 1


2


3

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Mimics.

4

Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Mimics, will now say Mimics off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

5

312401/B

If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Mimics off softbutton.

203


Note

When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Mimics off.

Commissioning

This function allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. 1


2


3

204

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Commissioning.

312401/B


4

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Commissioning, will now say Commissioning off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE COM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

5

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Commissioning off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note


Superuser

This function makes it possible to change alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. 1

2

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM

INFO DISPLAY.


312401/B

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Superuser.

205


4

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Superuser, will now say Superuser off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE SUP is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

5

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Superuser off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note


Password

1

2


INFO DISPLAY.

• The System Information Display window will now be opened.

206

312401/B


3

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Password.

4

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Password, will now say Password off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE KEY is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

5

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Password off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note


6.3.21 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information This procedure display all parameters for each tag such as values, alarm status, alarm limits etc. Do the following:

312401/B

207


1

Open the SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY. The procedure can be found in How to display system information on page 200.

2

At the upper right side on the System Information Display window, is a box with the text, Unit Display, beside it. Fill in the number of the wanted Distributed Processing Unit in this box.

3

Click on the Unit Display softbutton, or push the enter button. • The information on the selected Distributed Processing Unit will now be shown.

6.3.22 How to change time zone This function is used to change time zone when sailing eastwards or westwards. 1

2


INFO DISPLAY.


Click on the softbutton called, Set, under the text Timezone. • A window appears with a request for a password.

4

Fill in the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.

208

5

Choose the time zone by using the drop-down combo box.

6

Click OK.

312401/B


Note


6.3.23 How to change system time Note

Use the “change time zone” function above when going between different time zones. The K-Chief 500 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT), and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here. 1


2


3

Click on the softbutton called: Set System Time. • A window appears with a request for a password.

4


312401/B

209


5

Use the drop-down combo boxes and select date and time. Then click on the OK softbutton. • The new date and time is transferred to the other Operator Stations in the network if the Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.

Note


6.3.24 Info field This function is only for use by Kongsberg Maritime.

6.3.25 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Operator Stations which would not normally allow it. See Acknowledge on page 201 for more details.

6.3.26 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Operator Stations which normally would not allow it. See Mimic on page 203 for more details.

210

312401/B


6.3.27 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer 1


2


3

Click on the softbutton called: Disable CRP buzzer. • A window appears with a request for a password.

4

Fill in the password.

5

Click on the OK softbutton. • The CRP buzzer is now disabled. • The text on the softbutton changes to Enable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed.

To activate the buzzer again, do the following: 1

Open the System Information Display if it is not already open.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the Enable OCP buzzer softbutton • The CRP buzzer is now active. • The text on the softbutton changes to Disable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will disappear.

6.3.28 How to change tag parameters for a channel This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. Do the following:

312401/B

211


1


2

Use the trackball , point and double click on the line with the wanted tag. • Tag Details for that tag will be displayed.

3

Double click on the parameter you want to change.

4

A window appears with a request for a password.

5

Fill in the password and click on the Ok softbutton. • The parameter can now be changed to the wanted value. • The display picture is updated, and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Operator Station in the system.

Tag Details image on page 212 gives an illustration of a Tag Details image. Figure 84

Tag Details image

There are three softbuttons on the bottom of the tag details window. It is Tag Details, Advanced Tag Details and Tag Application. The following information is displayed by clicking on them: Tag Details

212

312401/B


Shows the normal tag details display. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Enable, stops checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Disable, starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Value, allows you to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor. Advanced Tag Details

Shows a full list of all tag details. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of displayed parameters. Tag Application

Lists other tags related to this tag. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. The following two tables explains what the different parameters for analogue and digital input tags are used for: Analogue input channel parameters Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No


Tag number

Number

No


Description

Text

Yes


Function

Text

No


Value

Number

No

Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered


Number

No


Channel number

Number

No


Channel type

Number

No


Type

Text

No

Analog/Digital


Number

Yes


Bridge group

Number

Yes


Autolog

Number

Yes


Noonlog

Number

Yes


Eventlog

Number

Yes


Offscan

Number

Yes


312401/B

213


Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Offscan value

Number

Yes


Inhibited by tag

Text

No


Access group

Number

Yes


Limit Alarm Low Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit


Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit


Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes


Dynamic Dead Band

Number

Yes


Counts Low

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng. Units Low

Number

Yes


Eng. Units High

Number

Yes


Alarm On-Delay1

Number

Yes


Alarm Off-Delay1

Number

Yes


Alarm On-Delay2

Number

Yes


Alarm Off-Delay1

Number

Yes


Inhibit On-Delay

Number

Yes


Inhibit Off-Delay

Number

Yes


Digital input channel parameters Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No


Description

Text

No


Function

Text

No


State

Text

No



Number

No


Channel number

Number

No


Channel type

Number

No


214

312401/B


Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function


Number

Yes


Bridge group

Number

Yes


Autolog

Number

Yes


Noonlog

Number

Yes


Eventlog

Number

Yes


Offscan

Number

Yes


Inhibited by tag

Text

No


Access group

Number

Yes



Yes/No

Yes



Yes/No

Yes


Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes


Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes


Alarm On Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Alarm Off Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Signal Cond On Delay

Number

Yes


Signal Cond Off Delay

Number

Yes


Signal Cond Invert

Yes/No

Yes

Invert input status

6.3.29 How to change Deviation parameters How to change limits.

This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking, and deviation from the corrected value. For instance used for main engine exhaust gas temperature. 1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C

• The new image on the screen will look like the figure underneath, A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display on page 216.

312401/B

215


Figure 85

A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display

3

Use the trackball and click on the limit you want to change. • A window is opened.

4

Type in the new wanted value.

5

Click Ok.

Use this procedure to change any value on this display. Note

When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked. How to make profile

The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all

216

312401/B


cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways, automatic correction and manual correction. Automatic correction

1


2


3

Use the trackball and click on the text which says: AUTO. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.

4

Push the enter button. • All values found for Current deviation are moved to Correction, and Current deviation should read 0 for all cylinders.

Manual correction

1


2


3

Use the trackball and click on the text which says: MAN. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction.

4

Use the trackball , point, and click to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. • The value for each cylinder under Current deviation should read 0. • For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to chapter Exhaust mean value tag items on page 397.

312401/B

217


6.3.30 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration Do the following procedure to get access to the Watch Calling Configuration: 1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: WATCHCALLING CONFIG

6.3.31 How to set the On Duty engineer Note

In order to set On duty engineer, the system must be in control watch. 1

Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.

2

If for example the 2nd engineer shall be sat on duty, just touch the thumbnail which says, 2ND ENG ON DUTY. • A indicator beside the officers title on the Watch Calling Units are lit. • Down in the left corner of the OS screen, the , a text with who is on duty is displayed.

3

To take the officer off duty again, click on the same thumbnail again.

6.3.32 How to select the Watch Responsible location Note

This procedure requires that an engineer is sat to on duty. Refer to chapter on page .

218

312401/B


The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. Use the following procedure to change Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following ways: On the Operator Station:

1

Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.

2

Touch the softbutton for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH). • When the watch responsibility has been accepted, the status will be shown at the function window on the Operator Station.


1

Push the button for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH buttons). • The indicator for the new location will flash and make a sound until it is accepted at that location. • The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The indicator for the previous location will be switched off (no longer lit).

6.3.33 How to call officers From the Operator Station you can call the different officers and engineers. Which officer and/or engineer you can call depends on the system configuration. The calling can be done by the following methods: Using the Operator Station:

The softbuttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1

312401/B

Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. (To illustrate this procedure the WCALL ENGINE main group is used as an example.)

219


• The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. The image underneath is an illustration of how it may look like.

2

Touch one of the thumbnail which says CALL DUTY ENG or CALL ALL ENG(depending on who you want to call). • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.

3

To cancel the call, just touch the same thumbnail again.


The buttons depends on the system configuration. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 1

Push the CALL DUTY ENG button or the CALL ALL ENG button on the Watch Bridge Unit (depending on who you want to call). • The call indicator will be lit. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.

2

220

To cancel the call, push the same button again.

312401/B


6.3.34 How to change the engineer qualifications When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced, the qualifications table needs to be updated. (The following example shows a qualification change for the Chief engineer:) 1

To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapterHow to access the Watch Calling Configuration on page 218.

2


3

Click on the qualification text beside the officer who are being replaced. • A similar window opens:

4

The different qualifications equals a number. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted qualification.

5

Click on the OK softbutton. • The new qualification has now been set. And the text has changed to the selected qualification.

6.3.35 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode When an engineer/officer or a group of engineers/officers are on duty, the Watch Bridge unit and Watch Cabin units are set to On Duty mode. When an engineer is Off Duty his or her’s panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive. What is Off Duty active

The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display the alarm information. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. What is Off Duty passive

312401/B

221


The panels will not sound an alarm. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the buttons on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark). 1

To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter How to access the Watch Calling Configuration on page 218.

2


3

Click on the mode text beside the officer it concern. (In this example, the Chief engineer is being replaced.) • A similar window opens:

4

The different modes equals a number. 1 is active and 0 is passive. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted mode.

5

Click on the OK softbutton. • The new mode has now been sat. And the text has changed.

6.3.36 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as “belonging” to that engineer-position. These are the panels in his’ or her’s cabin and in public areas. When an engineer is On duty, each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system.

222

312401/B


Note

This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station. Each panel has a unique serial number. The panels can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position, and the public areas. For example, all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be activated when the Chief Engineer is on duty. 1

2

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY

3

Use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton called:Watchcalling Configuration.

4

Click on the officer whose panel is being assigned to someone else. (In this example, the 3rd engineer’s panel is being assigned to someone else) • A similar window to this is opened:

• On the right side of the screen, there is a definition of the groups. It may look like this:

312401/B

223


5

Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted officer to assign the panel to.

6

Click on the OK softbutton.

6.3.37 How to make your own short trend display Introduction to short trend

The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. To display the data you can use the trend display. The trend display contains a graph selector panel where you can select between up to 8 different graph views. Each graph view can have up to 8 plots. You can select any tag for plot presentation. You will also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings will be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. When the desired tags are selected, you can select an hour in the time-line panel to plot the corresponding data. If you select the current hour, the system will continue to add changes to the graph upon changes in the tags. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. A preserve hour facility will save all tag data for a selected hour for later reference.

224

312401/B


Figure 86

The short trend display

How to make your own short trend display

Do the following: 1


2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SHORT TREND

312401/B

3

Select a graph by selecting one of the eight radio buttons in the graph selector panel.

4

Right click on one of the empty plot labels and select SELECT TAG in the pop-up menu. The SELECT TAG DIALOGUE will pop up.

5

Select a tag in the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. If desired, use the filter to reduce the number of tags shown.

6

Press OK to exit the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE.

7

Repeat step 5 to 7 to add more tags. .

8

Click on an hour in the time-line panel to plot the data.

225


If more than one tag shall be selected for plotting, there is an alternative way of doing this. In the upper part of the dialogue box is a check box with this text beside it: Automatically select the next plot when a tag is selected. Use the trackball and click in this check box. When this function is activated you can directly select the next tag you want to plot in the same diagram. Step 8 in the procedure above says to repeat step 5 to 8. But with this function activated you just repeat step 6 and click on the OK softbutton to add more tags in the diagram. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section on page . Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 237. How to select time in the trend display

The time-line panel present the last 24 hours with the current hour at the right end. If an hour is selected, the corresponding files are read from the hard disk. If the user selects current hour, the data is retrieved from the logging server instead, and the trend is continuously updating additional changes to the tags. Every new hour the labels are shifted one position to the left. Figure 87

The time-line at 16 hours with the 07 hour selected

Figure 88 selected

The time-line at 16 hours with the current hour

Do the following to select an hour: 1

Position the cursor by using the trackball slightly to the right of the desired hour.

2

Left-click.

3

Observe that the selected hour is marked and that the corresponding data is plotted in the graph.

Note

The selected hour can also be changed by using the left and right arrow keys.

226

312401/B


How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display

Each plot has its own y-axis. This makes it possible to manipulate them individually to make a more readable graph picture. You can zoom and pan a single plot or several plots at a time. Do the following to change a plot’s y-axis: 1 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the plot’s y-axis. Note that the axis label’s font is changed to BOLD. 2 Select the axis by clicking on it. • The axis labels background colour is changed to black to indicate that the axis is selected for y-axis manipulation. • When one axis or more is selected the y-axis control is displayed in the upper left corner of the plot area. Figure 89

Y-axis zoom and pan control

3 4

Repeat step 1 and 2 to add other axes. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as follows: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • In: Zoom in • Out: Zoom out • Auto: Set the axis to display the complete plot in 95% of the plot area • Set: Manually key in the minimum and maximum values • X: Deselects all selected axes and hide the y-axis control The arrow keys around the trackball can also be used to change the selected y-axis: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • Left: Zoom in • Right: Zoom out 5 Repeat step 1 and 2 on already selected plots to deselect an axis. It is also possible to select all the y-axis: 1 Click on the MENU softbutton. 2 A context menu is opened. 3 Select Y-Scale, by clicking on the text. 4 Select Select all plots, by clicking on the text.

312401/B

227


5

To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as described in the list above.

How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display

The graph includes one x-axis for all plots. Use the functions of the x-axis zoom and pan control to zoom and pan the x-axis. Figure 90

X-axis zoom and pan control

Click the buttons as follows to change the graph’s x-axis: Pan the graph to the left Pan the graph to the right Zoom out Zoom in The selected point in time will be illustrated in the time display to the right. In the sample below the graph is set to display the time between 10:35 and 10:40 approximately. Figure 91

Time display

How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display

It is possible to switch on and off a function whereby the plot’s actual position is marked with a small square. When the cursor is positioned over one of the points, a tool-tip box will pop-up displaying the point’s time stamp and actual value.

228

312401/B


Figure 92

Plot point value

Do the following to enable the display of plot points: 1

Position the cursor by using the trackball on the menu softbutton.

2


3


4

Select Points, to enable or disable displaying of plot points.

How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor

It is possible to switch on and off a cursor in the graph area. By positioning the cursor in x horizontally, the plot’s corresponding value is displayed in the plot label. A tool-tip with exact time information is also generated. Do the following to switch the cursor on:

312401/B

1

Right click in the plot area to open the context menu.

2

Select Show cursor. The cursor will be displayed and the graph label will indicate the cursor’s time position.

229


Figure 93

3

Cursor’s time position

Move the cursor to read values for other points: a

Move the cursor near the vertical cursor.

b

Click and hold the left button while moving the cursor horizontally.

c

Release the left button.

The values are now updated. How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display

It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the x-axis on and off. Figure 94

Display of x-axis grid-lines

Do the following to enable the display of x grid-lines:

230

1

Position the cursor on the menu softbutton, by using the trackball .

2


312401/B


3


4

Select Gridlines X-Axis to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines.

How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display

It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the y-axis on and off. The grid-line is connected to the plot’s y-axis and will have the same colour. Only grid-lines for one y-axis may be visible simultaneously. Figure 95

312401/B

Display of y-axis grid-lines

1


2


231


3

Select Show grid lines to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines for the selected plot.

4

Repeat step 1 to 3 on another plot to enable grid-lines for the selected plot.

How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display

A function called Fill-to-base enables the plot to colour the area between a pre-defined value and the plot value, with a colour derived from the plot colour. Figure 96

Fill-to-base function

The picture above shows the difference between a filled plot and a plot not. Do the following to enable the fill function for a plot: 1


2


3

Select Fill to base to enable or disable the fill function. The base value is set to zero by default, but it may be changed by selecting the menu item Set base.

How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display

The plot may be drawn in a digital or interpolated mode. Digital, means that the line is drawn between the points only by use of vertical and horizontal lines. This mode is best suited for digital values.

232

312401/B


In the ‘interpolated’ mode, the line is drawn as a straight line between the points assuming that the value has changed gradually rather than jumped to the new value. This mode is best suited for analogue type of values. Figure 97

Digital and interpolated mode

Do the following to switch between the two modes: 1

Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want to change.

2


3

Select Interpolate to enable or disable the interpolation mode.

How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display

You can add an annotation to each plot in a graph. An annotation is a mark that can be positioned on the plot to mark a point of special interest.

312401/B

233


Figure 98

Annotation

Do the following to add an annotation: 1


2


3

Select Annotation to enable or disable the annotation. The Annotation symbol is shown in the plot label.

4

Drag and drop the Annotation symbol to the desired position on the graph.

How to remove a plot in the trend display

Do the following to remove a plot:

234

1


2


312401/B


3

Select Remove to remove the plot.

How to save an image to the image repository

It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. The images in the repository can be viewed by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to save an image of a graph: 1 Select the graph that you want to save a snapshot of. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the Meny softbutton. 3 Right click to open the menu.

4

Select Save image to make a snapshot of the currently selected graph.

How to display an image in the image repository

It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. You can view saved snapshots by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to view an image in the image repository: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor between on the Meny softbutton. 2 Left click to open the menu.

312401/B

235


3

Select Image Viewer to display the Image Viewer. Figure 99

Image Viewer

4

To display it, select a thumbnail in the list view on the left side.

5

Select a graph view in the graph selector panel to exit the image viewer.

How to preserve an hour in the trend display

It is possible to preserve an hour for later reference. This function makes a copy of the stored data for the currently selected hour. Up to 10 data sets can be preserved. When 10 data sets are stored and the function is executed once more, the oldest data set is deleted. The data is named using the format YYMMDD_HH where YY denominates year, MM month, DD day and HH hour. Do the following to preserve an hour:

236

1

Select the hour you want to preserve in the time-line panel.

2


3


312401/B


4

Select Preserve hour to preserve the currently selected hour.

How to load an preserved hour in the trend display

It is possible to display data from preserved hours instead of the available 24 hours log. Do the following to load a preserved hour: 1


2


3

Select Load preserve hour to open the Preserved hours sub-menu.

4

Load one of the preserved hours by clicking on it. • The data for the hour is loaded and displayed.

How to preserve trend display settings manually

The trends display settings are normally saved automatically. This will make sure that your plot settings remain the same after a system restart. If you want to change the settings without saving your changes, it is possible to switch off the automatic saving, and save and load the display settings manually.

312401/B

237


Do the following to switch off the automatic saving: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. 2 Right click on the Menu softbutton.

3

Select Save automatically.

4 You can then operate the Save menu item. If you want to reload the setting again, press Load. If you want to remove all plots and plot settings in the graph, select Clear all.

6.3.38 How to make your own long trend display Introduction to long trend

The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. In addition, it is possible to configure up to 100 tags for long time trending. The logging interval may be set for each tag individually, ranging from 1 minute (giving 5 days) to 20 minutes (giving 100 days). To display the data, the long trend display is used. The long trend display contains a graph selector panel, where you can select between up to eight different graph views. Each graph view can have up to eight plots. You can select any of the configured tags for plot presentation. You may also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart.

238

312401/B


The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. Figure 100

The long trend display

How to operate the long trend display

The operation of the long trend display is nearly identical to operating the short trend display. Refer to the following issues in the short trend display chapter for further reference: How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display on page 228 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor on page 229 How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 230 How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 231 How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display on page 232 How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display on page 232

312401/B

239


How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display on page 233 How to remove a plot in the trend display on page 234 How to save an image to the image repository on page 235 How to configure a long trend

Do the following to configure a long trend 1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY on the TCP. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: LONG TREND

240

3

Click on the Menu softbutton, to open the dialogue box below.

4

Select Long trend setup from the menu.

312401/B


5

Find and select a tag in the Available tags panel. Use filters as desired.

6

Click Add to add the tag to Configured tags for long trend.

7

Repeat step 6 and 7 to add more tags.

8

Click in the Sampling interval / duration field to change the logging interval.

9

To remove an entry from logging, select the tag in the

Configured tags for long trend grid, and press Delete.

Please note that it will take some time before changes to the configuration is visible in the display. If tags are removed all the logged data for all tags below the removed tags will be cleared. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section on page . Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 237. How to load logged data in the long trend display

Every hour new data is added to the log files on disk by the log server. To view the updated data you can select Menu→Load.

If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. It is also possible to get the trend display to automatically load the updated data every 1 hour. Select the Load every hour to activate this function. Please be aware that if this function is activated, it may interrupt your system at an inconvenient point in time and it may take a few seconds to load the data. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data, an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. Click on this button to reload the data.

312401/B

241


6.4 MOS operational procedures 6.4.1 How to handle alarm events When a process parameter enters an alarm state, the following takes place: • The buzzer is activated • The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display • External alarm devices such as engine room horns are activated • The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at the bottom of the display Do the following to handle the alarm: 1

Push Sound off to turn audible alarms off. • This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices.

2

Push the ACK button. • This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of the display (the last incoming alarm). • This alarm text disappears.

3

Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next alarm and so on until no alarms are unacknowledged.

4

Attend to the alarm situation.

6.4.2 How to display alarm history Figure 101

242

Typical alarm history display

312401/B


1

Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.

2

Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.

3

Push 1 to display the Alarm History.

4

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time.

5

Push ENTER to display alarm details.

6.4.3 How to display alarm summary 1


2


3

Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary.

4

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time.

5


6.4.4 How to display alarm group information

312401/B

1


2


3

Push 3 to display the Alarm Group Information.

4

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select an alarm group.

243


5

Push ENTER.

6

Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag group.

7


6.4.5 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 1


2

Push 5 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen

3

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the item you want to change.

Colour palette 4

Push ENTER.

5

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select Day, Night or Dawn.

6

Push ENTER.

Keyboard click 7

Push ENTER.

8

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select On or Off.

9

Push ENTER.

Keyboard light 10 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 11 Push ENTER.

244

312401/B


Screen brightness 12 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 13 Push ENTER.

6.4.6 About password access An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The status of this system is available as follows: 1


2

Push 3 to display the User Access menu. • The user access levels are displayed. – On: Indicates that access at this level is possible – Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.

Note

Only one user access level can be selected at a time. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The following access levels are available: • Monitoring: Only for viewing information. • User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures. Used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally don’t have access to, such as for instance operating the power management from the cargo control room. • Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes. • Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes.

312401/B

245


Note

Do not leave the system while Commissioning or Superuser password access is available, as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Note

If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.

6.4.7 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details Distributed Processing Units are often abbreviated DPUs. 1


2

Push 6 to display the DPU Overview.

3

Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all DPUs one page at a time.

4

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step through each DPU one at a time.

5

For information about the tags for a particular DPU, select the DPU and push ENTER.

6

Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag.

Tag details view 7

246

Push ENTER to display the parameters for a particular tag.

312401/B


Figure 102

Tag details display

Tag menu When the tags for a DPU is displayed: 8

Push MENU. • The Tag Menu is displayed. This menu allows you to display various information about each tag as follows:

9

Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag →Tag Details.

10 Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. Use the function keys to operate the tag when available. 11 Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any). 12 Push 4 to set the selected tag as the Start Tag. 13 Push 5 to go to the main menu.

6.4.8 How to change tag parameters This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points.

312401/B

1


2

Push 6 to display the DPU Overview.

247


3

Use the Page down and Page up buttons and/or the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the DPU you want.

4

Push ENTER.

5

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the tag you want to change parameters for.

6

Push ENTER to display the parameters for the selected tag.

7

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the parameter you want to change. • Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allows a parameter to be changed: – Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current access level setting. – White parameter text: Parameter can be changed.

Note

If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it. 8

Push ENTER. • A parameter entry window is displayed.

9

248

Clear the existing value using the CLR button.

312401/B


10 Type in the new value. Note

A red text indicates that you have typed an illegal value. If you make an error push ESC to cancel the input.

11 Push ENTER. • The new value is inserted. The display picture is updated and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and other Midi Operator Stations and Operator Stations in the system. Analogue input tag parameters

The following table explains what the different parameters for analogue input tags are used for. Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No


Tag number

Number

No


Description

Text

Yes



Number

No


Channel number

Number

No


Channel type

Number

Yes


Type

Text

No


Number

Yes


Bridge group

Number

Yes


Autolog

Number

Yes


Noonlog

Number

Yes


Eventlog

Number

Yes


Offscan

Number

Yes


Offscan value

Number

Yes


Inhibited by tag

Text

No


Access group

Number

Yes


Limit Alarm Low Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

312401/B

249


Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit


Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit


Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes


Dynamic Dead Band

Number

Yes


Counts Low

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng. Units Low

Number

Yes


Eng. Units High

Number

Yes


Alarm Off-Delay1

Number

Yes


Alarm Off Delay1

Number

Yes


Alarm Off Delay2

Number

Yes


Alarm Off Delay2

Number

Yes


Digital input tag parameters

The following table explains what the different parameters for digital input tags are used for. Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Tag name

Text

No


Description

Text

No


Function

Text

No


State

Text

No



Number

No


Channel number

Number

No


Channel type

Number

No


Type

Text

No

Analog/Digital


Number

Yes


Bridge group

Number

Yes


250

312401/B


Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Function

Autolog

Number

Yes


Noonlog

Number

Yes


Eventlog

Number

Yes


Offscan

Number

Yes


Inhibited by tag

Text

No


Access group

Number

Yes



Yes/No

Yes



Yes/No

Yes


Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes


Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes


Al.Inhibit Src TagNo

Text

No

Refer to another Tag or Channel

Alarm On Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

Alarm Off Delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 1 second

On Delay

Number

Yes


Off Delay

Number

Yes


Invert input

Yes/No

Yes

Invert input status

6.4.9 How to change alarm limits Refer to How to change tag parameters on page 247.

6.4.10 How to change alarm delay Refer to How to change tag parameters on page 247.

312401/B

251


6.5 Watch Calling system operational procedures 6.5.1 How to receive a call When you receive a call, one of the watch location buttons is flashing. 1

Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call. • Button texts on buttons used to receive the call will vary.

6.5.2 How to respond to alarms When an alarm condition occur, the buzzer will sound and the alarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. Do the following: 1

Push SOUND OFF.

2

Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator. The ON DUTY engineer should also receive the alarm indicator and take appropriate action.

3

After a while, check that the alarm is no longer displayed on the Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected.

6.5.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer 1

Push the CALL XXX button (button texts will vary) to notify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge. • The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineer has acknowledged the call. Then it will be steady lit.

2

To terminate the call push the button again.

6.5.4 How to transfer watch responsibility 1

Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the other locations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility. • The LED indicator will flash until the transfer is acknowledged. When the indicator is steady lit watch responsibility has been transferred

252

312401/B


6.5.5 How to accept watch responsibility 1

When the indicator for your location begins to flash, push the button for your watch location. • This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watch responsibility to you.

6.5.6 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WBU) In Off Duty mode, all Watch Bridge Units can be defined as either active or passive. This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Operator Stations. Off Duty ACTIVE

The panel will not sound alarms, but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions. Off Duty PASSIVE

The panel will not sound alarms. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on an LCD panel will display the alarms. The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark. Figure 103

Watch Bridge Unit controls

6.5.7 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WCU) In Off Duty mode, all Watch Cabin Units can be defined as either active or passive. This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Operator Stations. Off Duty ACTIVE

The panel will not sound alarms, but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions. Off Duty PASSIVE

The panel will not sound alarms.

312401/B

253


LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Pushing the controls on an LCD panel will display the alarms. The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark.

254

312401/B


6.6 ShipViewer operational procedures 6.6.1 Main ShipViewer functions The ShipViewer has the following main functions: • Counter display • Alarm displays • DPU displays • Deviation displays • Alarm group displays • Alarm summery displays • Alarm history displays • Selected points display • Selected trend display • Selected bargraph display • Mimic diagrams as found in the Operator Station

6.6.2 Understanding the ShipViewer display Overview

All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar. The most frequently used functions are also directly available through the toolbar buttons. These are further described in the following. Figure 104

ShipViewer menu and toolbar

Toolbar buttons

Print screen Save image to disk Print preview

312401/B

255


Open image file Display version and build information Previous window Next window (after having used a previous window) Alarm summary display Alarm history display Alarm group display Running hours display DPU display Deviation display

Colour codes for data displays

The channel data is colour coded as follows: • Green: The channel is in a normal state • Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged • Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged • Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state • Blue: The channel is inhibited • Orange: Not updated or invalid values The background colour can be set to either dark blue or white. Dark blue is better when viewing some coloured texts, while white is better for printing. 1

256

Select Settings in the menu bar, and then either Select or Clear →No background colour.

312401/B


6.6.3 Explanation of ShipViewer displays Alarm summary display

The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries. Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are not displayed. The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time. Alarm group display

The alarm group display shows all measuring points in the pre-defined alarm groups. These group where defined during commissioning of the K-Chief 500. When selecting the alarm group display, a dialogue containing all alarm groups appears on the screen. In this dialogue all alarm groups with active alarms are indicated by a red dot. 1

Select an alarm group by clicking on its softbutton.

2

To switch between the alarm group view and group view, click on the Alarm Display/Group Display softbutton (down to the left) repeatedly. • The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name.

Alarm history display

The alarm history display shows active alarms and alarms returned to normal. 1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard. • The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. Alarms are sorted by date and time. Counter display

The counter display shows counters and lap counters for such components as pumps, generators, engines etc. included in the counter system of the K-Chief 500. Distributed Processing Unit display

The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows all measuring points connected to each DPU. 1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard.

312401/B

257


Deviation display

The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engines having deviation calculations in the K-Chief 500. 1

Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard.

Selected points display

The selected points display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to 20 tags. Note

More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. (See the Windows drop down menu). However, when you want to configure a new display, all other windows must be closed. Display existing tag selection: 1

In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected points display.

2

Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected points display is shown.

Make or alter tag selection: 1

In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected points display.

2

Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected points display is shown.

3

Click on the Config button. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed.

4

Use the Select pull down menu to select system.

5

Select tags and push Add. • The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to twenty tags.

6

Click OK.

Selected trend display

The selected trends display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to eight tags.

258

312401/B


Note

More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. (See the Windows drop down menu). However, when you want to configure a new display, all other windows must be closed. Display existing tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected trend display. 2 Select one of the five groups and clickOK. • The selected trend display is shown. 3 Click on the Time button to select trend sample time. 4 Click Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. 5 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. Make or alter tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected trend display. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected trend display is shown. 3 Click on the Config button. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. 4 Select a system under Select. 5 Select tags and push Add. • The selected trend display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to eight tags. 6 Click OK. 7 Click on the Time button to select trend sample time. 8 Click Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. 9 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. Selected bargraph display

The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraph display pages containing customer selected tags. Each display can include up to twelve tags. Note

More than one window may be open simultaneously. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. (See the Windows drop down menu). However, when you want to configure a new display, all other windows must be closed. Display existing tag selection:

312401/B

259


1

In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected bargraph display. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected bargraph display is shown. Make or alter tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected bargraph display. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. • The selected bargraph display is shown. 3 Click on the Config button. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. 4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system. 5 Select tags and click Add. • The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Select up to twelve tags. 6 Click OK. Mimic diagrams

All mimic diagrams found in the Operator Station are available through the ShipViewer. The number and design of these mimic diagrams are ship dependent. 1 Click on the Mimics button on menu bar. 2 Select a mimic diagram from the drop down list. Figure 105

ShipViewer mimics

6.6.4 How to print displayed information Use the following procedure to print the information seen on the colour graphics display: 1 Select Settings→No background colour.

260

312401/B


• This reduces the amount of ink used when printing. 2

Click on the Print icon in the tool bar.

Figure 106

ShipViewer settings menu

6.6.5 How to save ShipViewer images Use the following procedure to save the image seen on the colour graphics display: 1

Click on the Save icon in the tool bar. • A standard “file save” dialogue is displayed.

2

Enter file name and a location and click Save.

3

Use any program for handling pictures or bitmaps to view the file.

Figure 107

ShipViewer save dialogue (typical)

6.6.6 How to view saved mimic diagram files Use the following procedure to view a previously saved image: 1

312401/B

Click on the Open icon in the tool bar.

261


• A standard “file open” dialogue is displayed. 2

Select file name and a location and click Open. • The file will be displayed using Paint - a Microsoft program for viewing, editing or creating bitmap images.

Figure 108

262

ShipViewer open file dialogue (typical)

312401/B


6.7 ME monitoring operational procedures 6.7.1 ME monitoring overview mimic The Main engine monitoring overview mimic gives you full access to all subsystems in your configuration. It provides easy access to alarm view and easy detection of the position where the alarm occurs. Figure 109

ME monitoring overview mimic

6.7.2 Bearing Wear Engine overview mimic

The navigator button Bearing Wear will open the overview mimic. This mimic has links to detailed information mimics of Bearing Wear Monitoring, Bearing Wear Monitoring information and bearing temperature measuring points. To give the user a better overview of installed equipment and a fast overview of the condition; there is a cross-section drawing of the engine showing where the sensor/measuring points are. Status of these points is shown with colours.

312401/B

263


Figure 110

Engine overview mimic function

Bearing Wear monitoring mimic

When the operator selects WEAR through the Engine overview mimic, the navigator will open the Bearing Wear monitoring mimic. This mimic contains detailed information regarding the Bearing Wear monitoring system, as follows: • BWM sensor deviation shown in text and bar graph • BWM cylinder deviation shown in text and bar graph • BWM average sensor value alarm showing as a square around bar graph for BWM sensor deviation • Bearing Wear sensor temperature shown as text • Status RUN: indicating when system is sending out new values and that engine is protected with alarm • Bar graph scale: ± 1.00 [mm]

264

312401/B


Figure 111

Bearing wear monitoring mimic function

System overview mimic

This mimic indicates which part of the system that has a failure alarm. If any bearing wear sensor fails, this will be displayed by the mimics. The System overview mimic shows the topology and display, as well where sensors are connected. Figure 112

312401/B

Bearing Wear system overview mimic

265


Dynamic alarm limits

To avoid unnecessary/false bearing wear alarms, the bearing wear monitoring system is build up with dynamics alarm limits. Dependent upon system conditions, the alarm system will change alarm limits accordingly. Sensor deviation alarm limits have two value sets, which depends

on condition. LL

L

H

HH

Normal operation and all sensors OK

–0.5

–0.3

0.3

0.5

mm

Learning mode 1 or one or more sensors not approved

–0.7

–0.5

0.5

0.7

mm

LL L H HH -0.5 -0.3 0.3 0.5 mm -0.7 -0.5 0.5 0.7 mm Cylinder deviation alarm limits have two value sets. Default

values are given below. LL

L

H

HH

Normal operation and all sensors OK

–0.3

0.3

mm

Learning mode 1 or one or more sensors not approved

–5.0

5.0

mm

Note

Limit = ±5.0 disables any alarm. The Learning mode is only activated during first 500 hours running of the Main Engine. The intention of this mode is that the system after 500 running hours will download final data to sensors. The average sensor value alarm limit has in normal mode L/H-alarm = ±0.5 mm and LL/HH-alarm = ±0.7 regardless the condition of wear sensors. If the system is in learning mode, no alarms are generated. How to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters

All adjustments regarding bearing wear monitoring system are available on Tag Details for Bearing Wear tag (CYL0x-AVE-S).

266

312401/B


Figure 113

Tag Detail image of Bearing Wear tag

The following table explains what the different parameters for bearing wear tag are used for: Parameter name

Type

Adjust.

Tag name

Text

No


Number

No


Tag description

Text

No


Function

Text

No


Value

Number

No

Calculated value

RPM input tag

Number

No

Tag reference

BWM mode

Number

No

Tag reference

Cylinder dev. tag

Number

No

Tag reference

Fore sensor dev tag

Number

No

Tag reference

Aft sensor dev tag

Number

No

Tag reference

Sensors aft input tags

Number

No

Tag reference to data container

Sensors fore input tags

Number

No

Tag reference to data container

Max diff F_A

Number

Yes

Max allowed difference between sensors in deviation filter

Gain

Number

Yes

Gain for deviation filter

Bearing no

Number

No

Bearing number / cylinder number

Sub type

Number

No

Functional sub-type

Tag number

312401/B

Function

267


Dependant upon the condition of bearing wear system, events will be generated. The following table explains different events for bearing wear tag. Based on these events, alarm dynamic limits will adjust automatically. Event

Type

Function

E1 : Fore sensor deviation abnormal

Bit

Use largest alarm limits for fore deviation alarm

E2 : Aft sensor deviation abnormal

Bit

Use largest alarm limits for aft deviation alarm

E3 : Cylinder sensor deviation abnormal

Bit

Block alarms for cylinder deviation

Sensor System Failure

Each sensor has a system failure tag, and failure will be displayed as a value. This value is a code depending of type of fails sensor is reporting. The following table describes the type of system failure for bearing wear sensors: Value 0

268

Tag Details - failure description Normal

101

Chan 1 Sensor Break

102

Chan 1 Sensor P Overload

103

Chan 1 Sensor N Overload

201

Chan 2 Sensor Break

202


203


301

Chan 3 Sensor Break

302


303


401

Chan 4 Sensor Break

402


403


501

Device Sensor Break

502

Device Sensor P Overload

503

Device Sensor N Overload

507

Checksum Error in NVRAM

508

Checksum Error in PROGRAM

312401/B


Long Trend Logging

The main purpose of the long term log is documentation to classification societies that no wear has occurred. This log will give a good overview if there exists a slow progressing wear that can be repaired before it becomes critical. The following data is logged per cylinder: • TAGS – Sensor value FORE – Sensor value AFT – Average sensor value – Sensor deviation FORE – Sensor deviation AFT – Cylinder value • Type of value – Maximum value – Minimum value – Average value Data will be stored on: c:\ros\pdslog\BWlog\LongTermData

Each cylinder will have its own file: Cylxx-yyyy.csv

where xx is the number of the cylinder and yyyy the year. A new log file will be started each year. These files can be copied and be opened in an Excel sheet. The following information is available in this file: • Heading • Sample time The first line is the heading. Each tag name shows up 3 times. First the average value, then minimum and maximum: CYL01-AVE-S;CYL01-AVE-S min;CYL01-AVE-S max;......

The first column is the sample time: 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;....... 16.Aug.2008 10:49;.......

The values are separated by semicolons, which makes it easy to open the file in Microsoft Excel: 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.446;... 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.446;...

312401/B

269


0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.349;... 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.349;... 0.034;0.337;-0.285;0.349;... 0.175;0.396;-0.335;0.349;...

Short Trend Alarm Logging

When a bearing wear alarm occurs (sensor deviation, cylinder deviation or sensor average), a preserved short trend alarm log will be stored. Values for all tags related to the bearing wear system will be stored. Data is preserved for 23 hours before the alarm and 1 hour after the alarm. This will be stored on c:\ros\Pdslog\BWlog\Preserved

and saved in separate folders. The name of the folder is given by the date and time when the alarm occurs. It is possible to trend a preserved alarm folder. All details regarding the use of short trend displays are described in How to make your own short trend display on page 162. To be able to trend preserved data, the correct folder has to be selected, as shown below: Figure 114 Short trend display, selection of preserved folder (24 h log data)

A new display appears, where the requested folder to trend log data is selected, as shown below:

270

312401/B


Figure 115

Short trend display – select a folder

6.7.3 Cylinder Liner – Fluctuating monitoring (scuffing) The background for this function is to avoid problems with scuffing inside cylinders (piston wall). Fluctuating temperatures of the cylinder liners is an indication of scuffing. To be able to check scuffing conditions, the system stores a number of samples and calculates the difference between the largest and the lowest cylinder liner temperature within the set of samples. This is the maximum fluctuation in the temperature. By exceeding the alarm limit, the system will generate an alarm. The calculation of fluctuation is performed continuously on each cylinder liner temperature sensor. The highest and lowest liner temperature is detected in the set of samples. The fluctuation in the temperature is the difference between these two temperatures. The fluctuation is re-calculated every time the oldest sample is replaced with a new sample. The system will also generate an alarm if the fluctuation calculated for this temperature is greater than the alarm high-high limit, compared with the mean value for this engine. Fluctuating alarm – alarm high

An alarm is activated if the difference between the smallest sample and the largest sample is more than acceptable.

312401/B

271


Fluctuating deviation alarm – alarm high high (scuffing)

This liner temperatures fluctuation is compared with the mean fluctuation of all liner temperatures of this engine. There can be more than one liner temperature measurement to each cylinder. An alarm is activated if the difference between this fluctuating and the mean fluctuating is larger than the alarm high-high limit. Activate priming

The alarm high-high situation (deviation alarm) will activate the priming relay. This can be used for activating priming for the actual cylinder. Blocking

The alarms are not calculated if blocking is activated by the blocking input reference or the liner temperature is below inhibit low limit. The following conditions will disable alarm monitoring and priming: • Cylinder liner temp below low limit • Cylinder liner temp above high limit • Blocking tag with tag value below blocking limit Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic

When the operator selects the Cylinder Liner Temperature mimic, the navigator will open the monitoring mimic. This mimic contents the following detailed information regarding Cylinder liner monitoring: • Cylinder liner temperature shown in text and bar graph • Cylinder liner deviation temperature in text • Fluctuate temperature • Fluctuate deviation high high alarm (scuffing) • Mean cylinder liner temperature • Mean fluctuating temperature

272

312401/B


Figure 116

Short Cylinder liner temperature mimics

How to use fluctuate monitoring parameters

All adjustments regarding fluctuate monitoring tag are available on the Tag Detail parameter display. Figure 117

Tag Detail image of fluctuate monitoring tag

The following table explains what the different parameters for fluctuate monitoring tag are used for:

312401/B

273


Parameter name

Type

Adjust.

Tag name

Text

No


Number

No


Tag description

Text

No


Function

Text

No


Value

Number

No

Calculated value

Sample time

Number

Yes

Time between each sample within a set of samples [0.1 sec] Enter 20 (twenty) to get a 2 second time between the samples

Max value

Number

Yes

Maximum accepted cylinder liner temperature Values above this are rejected [0.1 deg C] Enter 4000 (four thousand) get a 400 (four hundred) deg C limit

Low limit

Number

Yes

Lowest cylinder liner temperature where this tag type can be active Insert zero to de-activate this functionality Also note the inhibit tag reference [0.1 deg C] Enter 500 (five hundred) get a 50 (fifty) deg C limit

Dead band scuffing alarm

Number

Yes

The fluctuation must be this much below the alarm limit to reset an activated scuffing alarm The dead band can not be larger than half the alarm high limit [0.1 deg C] Enter 20 to get a 2 deg C dead band

Dead band deviation alarm

Number

Yes

The fluctuation must be this much below the alarm limit to reset an activated deviation alarm The dead band can not be larger than half the alarm high-high limit [0.1 deg C]

Samples

Number

Yes

Number of temperature samples in each calculation Enter 60 to keep 60 samples in the calculation

Inhibit treshold value

Number

Yes

Minimum value in inhibit tags value for being active This parameter is zero if the inhibit tag is binary Enter 400 to get a 40 RPM limit

Text

No

The tag reference to the cylinder liner sensor Note the alarm high description

Tag number

Cylinder liner temperature

274

Function

312401/B


Parameter name

Type

Adjust.

Fluctuating mean value

Text

No

The reference to the tag holding the mean value of the fluctuation in all cylinder liner temperatures of this engine Note the alarm high-high description Insert zero to de-activate this functionality

Inhibit tag

Text

No

ME running or other binary source The calculations are stopped and any alarm is reset if inhibit is activated Insert zero to de-activate this functionality Also see the calculation low limit parameter (T3)

Primer tag

Text

No

Reference to an output tag / source for starting of priming of dedicated cylinder Activated by alarm high-high Insert a tag reference to activate the primer functionality / relay Disabled by blocking / inhibit

312401/B

Function

275


7 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, BRIDGE WATCH MONITORING SYSTEM 7.1 Overview The Bridge Watch Monitoring System is designed to monitor bridge activity and alert the master or other qualified navigators if the bridge becomes unattended. The system first alerts the officer of the watch through local alarm indication at the bridge unit, and if he/she is not responding, then alerts the master or other qualified officer. The system conforms to the requirements of IMO resolution MCS.128(75) Performance standards for a Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System (BNWAS) and the bridge class notations for ”one-man bridge operation”.

7.2 BWMS operational procedures 7.2.1 Normal use of the BWMS The purpose of Bridge Watch Monitoring is to continuously confirm that the bridge is attended. 1

To confirm that you are attending to the bridge push any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems panel. Or push any external sound off found on the bridge, whenever passing it. • Make sure to do this at an interval shorter than the alarm time.

2

When you hear the prewarning, immediately push any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems panel or any external sound off found on the bridge. • If you fail to do so within the prewarning time, the alarm will sound in the designated areas on the ship.

276

312401/B

Operational procedures, Bridge Watch Monitoring System

Figure 118 Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds

Figure 119

Alarm display, the timer has expired

7.2.2 How to turn the system on/off To turn the system on or off requires the superuser password.

312401/B

277


1

Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture, 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.)

2

Push the function key for ON (or OFF).

3

If requested, type in the password and push ENTER.

4

If you needed to type in the password, push the function key for ON (or OFF) again.

7.2.3 How to select backup navigator on duty Backup navigator on duty are person(s) assigned to investigate if the Bridge Watch Monitoring System Alarm sounds. Note

The alarm will always sound in the captains quarters. 1


2

Push the function key for the backup navigator(s) you want to assign.

3

Use the page down or page up to display all backup navigators. • Pushing the function key several times switches between selecting and not selecting the backup navigator.

7.2.4 How to turn system’s auto mode on/off To turn the system Auto-mode on or off requires the superuser password. Note

In Auto-mode, the system will automatically switch ON when the Autopilot is switched ON.

278

1

Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture.

2

Push the function key for AUTO (or MANUAL).

312401/B


3

If requested type in the password and push ENTER.

4

If you needed to type in the password, push the function key for AUTO (or MANUAL) again.

7.2.5 How to call for backup The system can be used to call for backup assistance at any time, even when the alarm interval has not expired. 1


2

Push the function key for Backup. • Audible and visual alarm indicators are activated.

3

To cancel the call push Backup again.

7.2.6 How to adjust system timers Changing system timers requires the superuser password. 1


2

Push ENTER. • The Tag Details View for the Bridge Watch Monitoring System is shown.

3

Use the navigator key to select Internal Check Time. • This is the time from the last push of any external sound off or Bridge Watch Monitoring panel key, until the alarm is given.

4

Push ENTER.

5

If requested, type in the password and push ENTER.

6

Use the CLR key to remove the existing interval.

7

Type in the new interval. • Allowable interval is between 3 and 12 minutes.

8

312401/B

Push ENTER.

279


9

Use the navigator key to select Last Stage Delay. • This is the interval between the alarm sounding in the captain and backup officers quarters, and the alarm sounding in the captain and all navigation officers quarters and public areas.

10 Push ENTER. 11 Use the CLR key to remove the existing interval. 12 Type in the new interval. • Allowable interval is between 0 and 3 minutes. 13 Push ENTER.

7.2.7 How to change between day and night viewing To set the display for day or night viewing do the following: 1


2

Push the function key for Day/Night. To change again push the key again. • For additional keyboard light and screen brightness settings, see “How to set keyboard and screen configuration” below.

7.2.8 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 1


2

Push 5 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.

3

Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select the item you want to change.

Colour Palette 4

280

Push ENTER.

312401/B


5

Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select Day, Night or Dawn.

6

Push ENTER.

Keyboard Click 7

Push ENTER.

8

Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select On or Off.

9

Push ENTER.

Keyboard Light 10 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 11 Push ENTER. Screen Brightness 12 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 13 Push ENTER.

7.2.9 How to change access level An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The status of this system is available as follows: 1


2

Push 3 to display the User Access menu. • The user access levels are displayed.

On: Indicates that access at this level is possible. Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible.

312401/B

281


Note

Only one user access level can be selected at a time. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. The following access levels are available: • Monitoring: Only for viewing information. • User: Allows (system) the operator to push sound off. • Superuser: Allows the operator to turn the Bridge Watch Monitoring System ON/OFF. Access automatically expires after 30 minutes • Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. Note

Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. Note

If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it.

282

312401/B

Operational procedures, Process Control System

8 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 8.1 Overview This chapter explains how to use the process control system of the K-Chief 500 system. It is intended for personnel familiar with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this manual. The following subjects are covered: • Operator Station process control • Midi Operator Station process control

8.2 About the Process Control System The following types of equipment can be controlled by the K-Chief 500 Process Control System: • Pumps • Fans • Compressors • Valves • PID controllers

8.3 OS operational procedures 8.3.1 How to operate a pump starter Pump starter functions

To control pumps the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping

312401/B

283


Pump starter types

The following types of pumps can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in the same direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Pump symbols

Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps, as shown below. One way, one speed pump

One way, two speed pump at low speed

One way, two speed pump at high speed

Pumps going revers Note

If the pump is a two way pump, the symbol arrow will change direction when it is sat to revers. The symbol for the one way, one speed pump may look the same as the symbol for the two way, one speed pump if it is going forward. The operator can differ the symbols by clicking on the pump symbol to open the dialogue box. In the dialogue box it is written what kind of pump it is. And if it is for instance a two way pump, the dialogue box has radio buttons for revers and forward. Some system configurations have also text under the symbol which state what kind of pump it is The symbol for the two way , one speed pump changes when it is sat to revers. Underneath is a figure illustrating the change in the symbol.

284

312401/B


Pump symbol colours

Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed pumps only: • Arrow fill green: Full speed • Arrow outline green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Parameters

Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse.

312401/B

285


Alarm and event enable

Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and the starter will be set to manual: • Trip • Start failure • Stop failure • Started without commanded Modes

The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and manual. • Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped • Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes. Single acting control

A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one way, one speed units only. If the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it is running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In this way the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information. Blackout

Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. To solve this set the delay to Off at the running and remote feedback, and the delay to On for the system blackout signal.

286

312401/B


Figure 120

Blackout sequence as described above

How to open the Pumps & Fans display

The Pumps & Fans display has a viewing of the most used pumps and fans in the system. It is possible to control the pumps and fans in this display, or they can be controlled from the other displays where they also are located. Where the pumps and fans can be found, and the number of pumps and fans in a system, vary according to the configuration. 1


2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: Pumps & Fans. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. (The name of the main group may vary according to the configuration.)

3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: Pumps & Fans. • A display similar to the one underneath will be opened.

312401/B

287


Note

The pumps may also be controlled on other displays where they also are located. How to start a pump

1

Open the display showing the pump and click on it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.

2

Click on the START softbutton. • The pump symbol changes colour to green.

How to stop a pump

1

Open the display showing the pump and click on it.

2

Click on the STOP softbutton. • The pump symbol changes colour to grey.

Note

Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded. More functions are then displayed. To get access to the functions, click on the expand softbutton:

288

312401/B


How to change the speed of a pump

1

Open the display showing the pump and click on it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.

2

Click on the expand softbutton to make the rest of the options available.

3

Choose the wanted speed by clicking in the check box.

4

Click on the START softbutton

How to change the direction of a pump

1

Open the display showing the pump and click on it.

2

Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to more functions

3

Choose the wanted direction by clicking in the check box.

Note

When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable. How to reset a pump

The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure.

312401/B

1

Push on the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.

2

Rectify the problem.

3

Open the display showing the pump.

289


4

Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want to reset, and click on it. • The pump is selected and the circle around the pump starts flashing. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.

5

Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to the reset function

6

Click on the RESETsoftbutton. • The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey.

Stand-by pump systems

A stand-by system includes a pump symbol for each stand-by pump. The priority number defines which pump will start first. The one with the lowest number first. The running pump do not need to have the lowest number. When two pumps have the same stand-by number, both will start simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest number will start at group start.

290

312401/B


Figure 121

Symbol for stand-by pump system

Stand-by system modes

The stand-by system can be set to one of two modes: • Auto: For normal stand-by system operation from the Operator Station. • Manual: The stand-by pump system is disabled. Pumps can be manually operated. Note


How to set a pump to auto or manual

1

Open the display showing the stand-by pumps.

2

Move the cursor over the stand-by pumps controller symbol, and click on it. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing. • A similar dialogue is shown:

312401/B

291


3

Push AUTO/MANUAL. • The controller changes between auto and manual. The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual).

How to start a stand-by pump system

To operate a pump system in stand-by mode both the pump controller for each of the pumps and the controller for the stand-by system must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must be started. Do the following: 1

Select the display showing the stand-by pumps.

2

Move the cursor over the stand-by pump controller symbol, and click on it. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.

3

Click AUTO. • The text background turns green and the text changes to AUTO.

4

Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system, and click on them. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

5

Click on the AUTO softbutton, for all the pumps. • The pump status changes to AUTO.

6

When all pumps are set to auto, move the cursor over the pump you want to start, and click on it.

7

Click on the START softbutton. • The pump symbol turns green. • The pump status changes to Running, auto.

292

312401/B


How to stop a stand-by pump system

This procedure shows you how to take a pump system out of stand-by mode, set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required. 1


2

Move the cursor over the stand-by pumps controller symbol, and click on it. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.

3

Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to the reset function

4

Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • The text background turns grey. • The controller is set to manual. • The dialogue may look similar to the one underneath:

5

If the pump shall stop running, move the cursor over it, and click. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

6

Click on the STOP softbutton. • The pump symbol turns grey. • The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL, manual.

How to take a pump out of the stand-by system

To take a pump out of the stand-by system, set the pump to manual.

312401/B

293


1


2

Move the cursor over the pump, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

3

Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • If the pump shall stop, click on the manual softbutton.

4

If you need to stop the pump, click on the STOP softbutton. • The pump symbol turns grey. • The pump status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL, manual.

How to put a pump back into the stand-by system

1


2

Move the cursor over the pump, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

3

Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The pump status changes to AUTO.

4

If the pump do not start, click on the START softbutton.

How to handle a failure to a running pump

Pump failures are detected through a drop in pressure. • The pressure indicator turns red, indicating a drop in pressure. • The 1st stand-by pump starts. • The failing pump goes to MANUAL. It will keep on running or stop, dependent on how the system is configured. 1

Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.

2


How to set stand-by priority

A stand-by pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps. This procedure shows how to set stand-by priority to a pump system with three pumps.

294

312401/B


1

Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

2

Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to all the functions.

3

Click on the Master softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (1).

4

Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as first stand-by, and click on it. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

5

Click on the 1st stand-by softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (2).

6

Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as next stand-by. • The pump is selected. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

7

Click on the Next stand-by softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (3).

8.3.2 How to operate a fan starter Fan starter functions

To control fans the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto & manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch or blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping

312401/B

295


Fan starter types

The following types of starters can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in one direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Fan symbols

Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans, as shown below. One way, one speed fan

One way, two speed fan at low speed

One way, two speed fan at high speed

Fans going revers Note

If the fan is a two way fan, the symbol inside the circle (of the symbol) will change direction when it is sat to Exhaust. The symbol for the one way, one speed fan may look the same as the symbol for the two way, one speed fan if it is going forward. The operator can differ the symbols by clicking on the fan symbol to open the dialogue box. In the dialogue box it is written what kind of fan it is. And if it is for instance a two way fan, the dialogue box has radio buttons for Exhaust (revers) and Supply (forward). Some system configurations have also text under the symbol which state what kind of fan it is The symbol for the two way , one speed fan changes when it is sat to Exhaust (revers). Underneath is a figure illustrating the change in the symbol.

296

312401/B


Fan symbol colours

Fan symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed fans only: • Shape fill green: Full speed • Shape outline green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid How to start a fan

1

Open the display showing the fan.

2

Move the cursor over the fan, and click on it. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan starts flashing. • A dialogue similar to the one underneath is opened.

312401/B

297


3

Click on the START softbutton. • The fan symbol turns green.

How to stop a fan

1


2

Move the cursor over the fan, and click on it. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan starts flashing.

3

Click on the STOP softbutton. • The fan symbol turns grey.

How to reset a fan

The fan logic must be reset when the fan has tripped, or as the result of a start failure. 1


2

Rectify the problem, if any.

3


4

Move the cursor over the fan you want to reset, and click on it. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan starts flashing.

5

Click on the expand softbutton, to get access to all the functions.

6

Click on the RESET softbutton. • The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.

298

312401/B


8.3.3 How to operate a compressor Purpose

The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure below describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal. Figure 122 sensor

A 2-compressor system with common pressure

The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled: Compressor starter functions

To control the compressor the following functions and features are available: • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Compressor control types

Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure

312401/B

299


Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop Compressor symbol

To illustrate a compressor the following symbol is used: Figure 123

Compressor symbol

Compressor symbol colours

The compressor symbol has colours according to the state it is in. Arrow colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Leader follower compressor system

A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor. (It has also a symbol which shows if it is in auto or manual.) The compressor symbol is displayed above.

300

312401/B


Figure 124

Leader follower compressor system

Priorities

For automatic operation the compressor starter must be set to auto mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows: • Leader • 1st follower • 2nd follower • 3rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start setting for the 1st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting, and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue pressure sensors, all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit. Pressure tags

Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when the time has expired. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Start/stop conditions

Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters. Start

312401/B

301


Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are: • Pressure lower than the start limit. • When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired. Stop The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual. When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used, separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are: • Pressure higher than the stop limit • Stop leader signal is active • High-high pressure Auto Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way disabled from operating. In the following different examples for start and stop conditions are given. Leader control The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits. Figure 125

Leader start stop limit

Start follower on pressure drop Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting.

302

312401/B


Figure 126

Start 1st follower on pressure setting

Figure 127

Start two followers on pressure setting

Start follower after a time delay The 1st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2nd and 3rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor. Figure 128

Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram

In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time delay. The timer is started when the 2nd follower meets its start conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start immediately.

312401/B

303


Figure 129

Start followers after a time delay

The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. If the first and the second compressor does not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3 times; start delay after the leader had its start condition. Figure 130

Followers start timers

In the illustration bellow, the followers are started after time delays. The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the first follower meets its own start condition (before the delay has expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and count the time from this event. Figure 131

Interrupted start timer

Built in hysteresis This function operates using two pressure switches: • The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch • The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch

304

312401/B


Figure 132

Built in hysteresis

By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other. Two analogue pressures In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit. Figure 133

Two analogue pressures

Overhaul function Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: • Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors. • Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to “out of service”. Different configurations are available as required by the customer. How to set a compressor system to auto or manual mode

A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes:

312401/B

305


Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Operator Station. Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. 1

Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system.

2

Move the cursor over the leader follower compressor controller symbol, and click on it. • The compressor controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.

3

Click on the AUTO or the MANUAL softbutton. • The controller changes between auto and manual. • The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual).

How to start a leader follower compressor system

To operate a leader follower compressor system in stand-by mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto. Then one of the compressors must be started. Note

When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will not start. 1


2

Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol, and click on it. • The controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.

3

Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The text background turns green and the text changes to auto.

4

Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leader follower system, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

306

312401/B


5

Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The compressor status changes to auto.

6

Do the procedure from item 4 to 5 for each of the compressors.

7

When all of the compressors are set to auto, move the cursor to the compressor you want to start, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

8

Click on the AUTO softbutton.

9

Click on the START softbutton to start the compressor.

10 Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The button status changes to Running, remote CTRL, auto. How to stop a leader follower compressor system

To take a leader follower compressor system out of stand-by mode, set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required. 1


2

Move the cursor over the controller symbol, and click on it. • The controller is selected. • The text background starts flashing.

3

Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • The controller is set to manual.

4

To stop the running compressor, move the cursor over it and click. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

5

Click on the STOP softbutton. • The compressor symbol turns grey. • The compressor status changes to Ready to start, remote CTRL, manual.

312401/B

307


How to set the leader follower priority

A stand-by compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. (In this procedure the system consist of three compressors) 1

Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system.

2

Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as leader, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

3

Click on the Master softbutton. • The text changes to leader.

4

Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the first follower, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

5

Click on the 1st standby softbutton. • The text changes to follower.

6

Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the second follower, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

7

Click on the Next standby softbutton. • The text changes to follower (2).

How to reset compressors

The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure.

308

1

Push on the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.

2


3

Open the display showing the compressor.

312401/B


4

Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset, and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.

5

Click on the RESET softbutton. • The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey.

8.3.4 How to operate valves Valve control functions

The following functions and features are available: • Monitoring of the controlled valve • Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback • Blocking from opening • Blocking from closing • Blocking from operation (local control) • Deviation monitoring • Update alarm status • Update event status • Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of positioning Valve control types

The valve control can operate the following types of configurations: On-off valves • Single acting: One relay for control • Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback • Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks • Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single acting control • Double acting: Two relays for control • Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback • Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks

312401/B

309


• Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double acting control Analogue positioning valves • Analogue out: Step-less positioning • Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback • Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning • Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback • Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks. Monitoring Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided. • One feedback: No control, one binary feedbacks • Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks Valve symbols

Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves. Underneath is two examples: Figure 134

Valve symbol (example 1)

Figure 135


Valve symbol colours

Valve symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Single and double acting valves • Green: Open • Grey: Closed • Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid

310

312401/B


Throttle valves • Green: Feedback at set point • Grey: Closed/stopped • Yellow: Feedback outside dead band • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %. Note

As a default, valves will give an alarm on time-out - when not reaching the end position or setpoint. How to open on-off valves

1

Open the display showing the valve.

2

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.

3

Click on the OPEN softbutton. • The current status and the new command is displayed. • The symbol colour changes to green.

Note


312401/B

311


How to close on-off valves

1


2

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The valve is selected. The tag, tag description and the current state of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.

3

Click on the CLOSE softbutton. • The current status and the new command is displayed. • The symbol colour changes to grey.

How to operate analogue valves

1


2

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The text Enter new setpoint (0.0-100.0 %): is displayed in a dialogue. (0 %; fully closed, 100 %; fully open).

3

Type in the new setpoint.

4

Push ENTER. • The valve setpoint is changed.

How to operate throttle valves

1


2

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The equipment is selected. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected.

Open valve to 100 %

3

To open the valve to 100 %, use the trackball and click on the OPEN softbutton. • The status changes, first to opening then to opened.

312

312401/B


Close valve to 0 %

4

To close the valve to 0 %, use the trackball and click on the CLOSE softbutton. • The status changes, first to closing then to closed.

Throttle mode

5

To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100 %, use the trackball and click in the Throttle mode check box. • The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease.

6

Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease softbutton, and click on it.

7

Type in the new setpoint value.

8

Push ENTER. • The setpoint changes.

How to reset valves

Resetting of valves is required on time-out. 1


2

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate, and click on it. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The valve is selected. The tag, tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.

3

Click on the RESET softbutton. • The symbol colour changes to grey.

8.3.5 How to operate a PID controller PID controller symbol

The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc.

312401/B

313


Figure 136

PID controller

The controller can operate in two modes: • Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The controller operates when active. • Deactive (off): The PID controller does not control the process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual valve positioning is possible. Figure 137

PID controller symbol

PID controller symbol colours

• Green: Active • Blue: Blocked or configuration fail • Grey: Deactive • Red: Alarm • Orange: Invalid

314

312401/B


How to select a PID controller

1

Open the display showing the PID controller.

2

Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate, and click on it. • The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square is displayed around the controller.

Figure 138

Symbol for an active PID controller

How to activate the controller

1

Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and click on it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath is opened:

2

Click on the ON softbutton. • The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the controller.

3

Click and enter a new setpoint in the dialogue . • The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed.

4

Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.

5

Push ENTER. • The new process setpoint is displayed. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint.

312401/B

315


How to deactivate the controller

1

Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and cick on it.

2

Click on the STOP softbutton. • The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed, but is showing N/A in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.

3

Click and enter a new actuator setpoint. • The prompt ACT., DEACT. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed.

4

Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard.

5

Push ENTER. • The new actuator setpoint is displayed.

Note

You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value. Figure 139

PID controller symbol (not active)

8.4 MOS operational procedures Note

An access control system limits the possibility to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters to those who have the right password.

316

312401/B


8.4.1 How to open Tag overview The Tag overview is a list where you can select the display picture you want to open. The display pictures are available for all controlled units. 1

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed.

2

Push 2 to display the Tag Selection Menu.

3

Push 1 to display the Control Menu. • A list of alternatives are displayed. The list of groups may vary according to the system configuration.

Underneath is a list of groups and its number in parenthesis: • Pumps (1) • Compressors (2) • Valves (3) • Controllers (4) • Stand-by sets (5) Note

The contents of the list above may vary depending on the system configuration. 4

Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to mark the wanted group. Then push enter to select it. It is also possible to select a group by using the numeric keys.

8.4.2 How to operate a pump starter Pump starter functions

To control pumps the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout

312401/B

317


• Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Pump starter types

The following types of pumps can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in the same direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Pump symbols

Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps, as shown below. One way, one speed pump

One way, two speed pump at low speed

One way, two speed pump at high speed

Two way, one speed pump going forward

Two way, one speed pump going in reverse

Two way, two speed pump going forward at low speed

Two way, two speed pump going forward at high speed

318

312401/B


Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at low speed

Two way, two speed pump going in reverse at high speed

Pump symbol colours

Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed pumps only: • Arrow fill green: Full speed • Arrow half filled green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Parameters

Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse

312401/B

319


Alarm and event enable

Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. The following conditions will result in alarms, and the starter will be set to manual: • Trip • Start failure • Stop failure • Started without commanded Modes

The starter can be operated in two different modes; auto and manual. • Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped • Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero, and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes. Single acting control

A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running, and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. This functionality applies to one way, one speed units only. If the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it is running, the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. In this way the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information. Blackout

Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. On a blackout, the starter will lose the remote signal. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local, and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. To solve this set the Offdelay, at the running and remote feedback, and the Ondelay, for the system blackout signal.

320

312401/B


Figure 140

Blackout sequence as described above

How to start a one way one speed pump

1

Select the pump in the Tag Overview. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for START. • The pump symbol turns green. • The pump status changes to Running.

How to stop a one way one speed pump

1

Select the pump in the Tag Overview. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for STOP. • The pump symbol turns grey. • The pump status changes to Ready, remote.

How to operate a two way and to speed pump Note

Depending on the system configuration, the text for the function keys may vary 1

Select the pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

You may need to use the page down or page up keys to gain access to the function keys you need.

3

Push the function key for the function you want.

Typical control texts:

312401/B

321


• Start Low Forward • Start High Forward • Start Low Revers • Start High Revers • Stop Note

When changing direction the pump will stop, and start in the reverse direction after a delay. The delay is configurable. How to reset a pump Note

This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled to the Midi Operator Station. The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure. 1

Push the Sound off button to turn the audible alarm off.

2

Select the display showing the pump.

3


4


5

Push the function key for RESET. • The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey.

Stand-by pump systems

A stand-by system includes a pump symbol for each stand-by pump. The priority number defines which pump will start first, and the one with the lowest number is first. The running pump do not need to have the lowest number. When two pumps have the same stand-by number, both will start simultaneously. If no pump is running, the pump with the lowest number will start at group start.

322

312401/B


Figure 141

Symbol for a stand-by pump system

Stand-by system modes

The stand-by system have two modes: • Auto: For normal stand-by system operation from the Midi Operator Station. • Manual: The stand-by pump system is disabled. Pumps can be manually operated. How to set the mode

1

Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for Auto or Manual. • The mode indicator changes between auto and manual. The ring around the pump symbol and the background colour for the mode indicator changes between yellow (auto) and grey (manual).

How to start a stand-by pump system

To operate a pump system in stand-by mode, both the pump controller for each of the pumps and the controller for the stand-by system, must be set to auto. Then one of the pumps must be started. Do the following:

312401/B

323


1

Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Use the navigator key to select each of the pumps, one at a time. • A white square is displayed around the pump.

3

Push the ENTER button. • The pump is displayed.

4

Push the function key for AUTO. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Auto. • The ring around the pump symbol changes to yellow.

5

Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the stand-by pump system display.

6

Select each of the remaining pumps and set them to AUTO. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 5.)

7

The stand-by pump system is set to AUTO. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns green and the text changes to Auto.

8

Use the navigator key to select the pump you want to start. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

9


10 Push the function key for START. • The pump starts. How to stop a stand-by pump system

To take a pump system out of stand-by mode, set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required.

324

312401/B


1

Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.).

2

Push the function key for MANUAL. • The stand-by pump system is set to Manual. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator grey and the text changes to Manual.

To stop the running pump do the following: 3

Use the navigator key to select the pump you want to stop. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

4


5

Push the function key for STOP. • The pump stops.

How to take a pump out of the stand-by system

To take a pump out of the stand-by system, set the pump to manual. 1

Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.) • If the stand-by pump system consists of only two pumps, the stand-by functionality can not be maintained.

2

If the pump system consists of only two pumps, push the function key for MANUAL. Otherwise go to step 3. • The stand-by pump system controller is set to Manual.

3

Use the navigator key to select the pump. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

4


312401/B

325


5

Push the function key for MANUAL. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Manual.

6

Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the stand-by pump system. • The pump symbol is grey.

How to put a pump back into the stand-by system

1

Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.).

2

Use the navigator key to select the pump. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

3


4

Push the function key for AUTO. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Auto. • The ring around the pump symbol turns yellow.

5

Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the stand-by system display.

How to handle a failure to a running pump Note

This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled on the Midi Operator Station. Pump failures are detected through a drop in pressure. • The pressure indicator turns yellow, indicating a drop in pressure. • The 1st stand-by pump starts. • The failing pump goes to manual. It will keep on running or stop, depending on how the system is configured.

326

312401/B


1


2


How to set stand-by priority

A stand-by pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps. 1

Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview).

2

Use the navigator key to select each of the pumps, one at a time, to set their priority. • A white square is displayed around the pump.

3

Push ENTER to select it. • The pump is displayed.

4

You may need to use the page down or page up keys to gain access to the function keys you need.

5

Push the corresponding function key to set the priority of the pump. • The number of priorities depends on the number of pumps, normally 2 or 3.

6

Push the ESC button, to return to the stand-by pump system display.

7

Select and set the priority for each pump as described above, until all priorities are set.

8.4.3 How to operate a fan starter Fan starter functions

To control fans the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded

312401/B

327


• Auto & manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Fan starter types

The following types of starters can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in one direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Fan symbols

Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans. One way, one speed fan

One way, two speed fan at low speed

One way, two speed fan at high speed

Two way, one speed fan going forward

Two way, one speed fan going in reverse

Two way, two speed fan going forward at low speed

328

312401/B


Two way, two speed fan going forward at high speed

Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at low speed

Two way, two speed fan going in reverse at high speed

Fan symbol colours

Fan symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed fans only: • Shape fill green: Full speed • Shape half filled green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid How to start a fan

1

Select the fan in the Tag overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for START. • The fan symbol turns green. • The fan status changes to Running.

312401/B

329


How to stop a fan

1

Select the fan in the Tag overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for STOP. • The fan symbol turns grey • The fan status changes to Ready, remote.

How to reset a fan Note

This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled on the Midi Operator Station. The fan logic must be reset when the fan has tripped, or as the result of a start failure. 1

Push the sound off button to turn of the audible alarm.

2


3


4


5

Push the function key for RESET. • The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey.

8.4.4 How to operate a compressor Purpose

The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors. The figure below describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal.

330

312401/B


Figure 142 sensor

A 2-compressor system with common pressure

The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. The following functions are handled: Compressor starter functions

To control the compressor the following functions and features are available: • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of starting, running and stopping Compressor control types

Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop Compressor symbols

Compressors have the following symbol;

312401/B

331


Figure 143

Compressor symbol

Compressor symbol colours

The compressor symbols have colour according to the state they are in. Arrow colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Leader follower compressor system

A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor. Figure 144

Leader follower compressor system

Priorities

For automatic operation the compressor starter must be set to auto mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows:

332

312401/B


• Leader • 1st follower • 2nd follower • 3rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. The start setting for the 1st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting, and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. For systems with analogue pressure sensors, all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit. Pressure parameters

Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when this timer has expired. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Start/stop conditions

Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters. Start Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. Start conditions are: • Pressure lower than the start limit. • When a compressor is starting, a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired. Stop The stop limit can be the same for all compressors, or individual. When analogue pressure sensors are used, each priority has separate stop settings. When binary pressure sensors are used, separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority. A common stop sensor can also be used. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. Stop conditions are: • Pressure higher than the stop limit

312401/B

333


• Stop leader signal is active • High-high pressure Auto Two modes exist, auto and manual. Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked, or in any way disabled from operating. In the following different examples for start and stop conditions are given. Leader control The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits. Figure 145

Leader start stop limit

Start follower on pressure drop Each priority has its own start and stop settings. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting, and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting. Figure 146

Start 1st follower on pressure setting

Figure 147

Start two followers on pressure setting

Start follower after a time delay

334

312401/B


The 1st follower can start on its own pressure setting, or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. The 2nd and 3rd followers will start in similar ways. There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor. Figure 148

Start follower after a time delay - principle diagram

In the illustration below, the third follower will start after a time delay. The timer is started when the 2nd follower meets its start conditions. If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired, the third follower will start immediately. Figure 149

Start followers after a time delay

The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. If the first and the second compressor does not start on their own start settings, the third follower is started 3 times; start delay after the leader had its start condition. Figure 150

312401/B

Followers start timers

335


In the illustration bellow, the followers are started after time delays. The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. If the first follower meets its own start condition (before the delay has expired), the second and third followers will reset their timers, and count the time from this event. Figure 151

Interrupted start timer

Built in hysteresis This function operates using two pressure switches: • The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch • The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch Figure 152

Built in hysteresis

By adjusting the pressure switches differently, the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other. Two analogue pressures In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one of the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit.

336

312401/B


Figure 153

Two analogue pressures

Overhaul function Two reservoirs system have an overhaul function. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: • Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors. • Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to “out of service”. Different configurations are available as required by the customer. How to set a compressor system to auto and manual mode

A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes: Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Operator Station. Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. 1

Select the leader follower compressor in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for AUTO or MANUAL. • The controller text changes between auto and manual. The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual).

How to start a leader follower compressor system

To operate a leader follower compressor system in stand-by mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto.

312401/B

337


Note

When the pressure is higher than the stop limit, the compressor will not start. 1

Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Use the navigator key to select each of the compressors, one at a time. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

3

Push the ENTER button. • The compressor is displayed.

4

Push the function key for AUTO. • The compressor controller for this compressor is set to Auto. • The ring around the compressor symbol changes to yellow.

5

Push the ESC button. • The display returns to the compressor system display.

6

Select each of the remaining compressors and set them to auto. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 5)

7

Return to the compressor system display.

8

Push the function key for AUTO. • The stand-by compressor system is set to Auto. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns green and the text changes to Auto.

How to stop a leader follower compressor system

To take a leader follower compressor system out of stand-by mode, set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required.

338

312401/B


1


2

Push the function key for MANUAL. • The stand-by compressor system is set to Manual. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns grey and the text changes to Manual.

Do the following to stop the running compressor: 3

Use the navigator key to select the compressor. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

4


5

Push the function key for STOP. • The compressor is stopped.

How to set leader follower priority

A leader follower compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. 1


2

Use the navigator key to select each of the compressors, one at a time, to set their priority • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.

3


4

Push the page down key.

5

Push the corresponding function key to set this compressors priority. • The number of priorities depend on the number of compressors, normally 2 or 3.

312401/B

339


6

Push the ESC button to return to the display.

7

Select each of the remaining compressors until all priorities are set for all of them. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 6)

How to reset a compressor Note

This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled to the Midi Operator Station. The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure. 1

Push the sound off button to turn the audible alarm off.

2

Select the display showing the compressor.

3


4


5

Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset.

6

Push the function key for RESET. • The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey.

8.4.5 How to operate a valve Valve control functions

The following functions and features are available: • Monitoring of the controlled valve • Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback • Blocking from opening • Blocking from closing • Blocking from operation (local control) • Deviation monitoring • Update alarm status • Update event status

340

312401/B


• Optional time stamp on every change of operation, allowing the system to record time of positioning Valve control types

The valve control can operate the following types of configurations: On-off valves • Single acting: One relay for control – Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback – Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks – Single acting with no feedback: No feedback, only single acting control • Double acting: Two relays for control – Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback – Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks – Double acting with no feedback: No feedback, only double acting control Analogue positioning valves • Analogue out: Step-less positioning – Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback • Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning – Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback – Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks. Monitoring Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner, and no relay or other control is provided. • One feedback: No control, one binary feedback • Two feedbacks: No control, two binary feedbacks Valve symbols

Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves.

312401/B

341


Figure 154


Figure 155


Valve symbol colours

The valve symbols have colour according to the state they are in. Single and double acting valves • Green: Open • Grey: Closed • Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves • Green: Feedback at set point • Grey: Closed/stopped • Yellow: Feedback outside dead band • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local - not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %. Note

As a default, valves will give an alarm on time-out - when not reaching the end position.

342

312401/B


How to open an on-off valve

1

Select the valve in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for OPEN. • The valve symbol turns green. • The valve status changes to Open.

How to close an on-off valve

1


2

Push the function key for CLOSE. • The valve symbol turns grey. • The valve status changes to close .

How to operate an analogue valve

1


Do the following to open the valve: 2

Push the function key for OPEN to 100 %.

Do the following to close the valve: 3

Push the function key for CLOSE to 0 %.

Do the following to position the valve to a setpoint: 4

Push the function key for SETPOINT 0-100 %. • A setpoint input window is displayed.

5

Use the CLR key to delete the existing setpoint

6

Type in the new setpoint.

7

Push the ENTER button. • The valve setpoint has changed • The valve is repositioned to reach the new setpoint.

312401/B

343


How to reset a valve

Resetting of valves is required on time-out. Do the following to reset: 1


2


3

Select the display showing the valve.

4

Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to reset.

5

Push the function key for RESET. • The valve symbol changes from red to grey.

8.4.6 How to operate a PID controller PID controller symbol

The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves, pressure controlled valves, frequency controlled pumps etc. Figure 156

PID controller

The controller can operate in two modes: • Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. The controller operates when active. • Deactive (off): The PID controller does not control the process. If the controller operates on an actuator, manual valve positioning is possible.

344

312401/B


Figure 157

PID controller symbol

PID controller symbol colours

• Green: Active • Blue: Blocked or configuration fail • Grey: Deactive • Red: Alarm • Orange: Invalid How to activate the controller

1

Select the PID controller in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for ON command. • The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the controller.

3

Push the function key for ACTUATOR SETPOINT to enter a new set point. • A setpoint input window is displayed.

4

312401/B

Use the CLR key to remove the existing setpoint.

345


5

Type in the new setpoint value.

6

Push the ENTER button. • The new setpoint is displayed. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint.

How to deactivate the controller

1

Select the PID controller in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317, for more details on how to open the Tag overview.)

2

Push the function key for OFF Command . • The Active circle turns grey. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed, but N/A is displayed in the Setp. field. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner.

Note

You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value. Figure 158

346

PID controller symbol (not active)

312401/B

Operational procedures, Power Management System

9 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9.1 Overview This chapter teaches you how to use the Power Management System (PMS) of the K-Chief 500 system. It is intended for personnel familiar with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this manual. The following subjects are covered: • Operator Station PMS control • Midi Operator Station PMS control

9.2 About the Power Management System Change-over functionality

Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have change over functionality. When any of these alarms are given, a standby diesel generator starts and connects. The failing generator will then unload and disconnect. After the generator is disconnected the diesel generator may continue running, cool-down and stop, or stop directly. This is dependent on the configuration. Automatic start and connect when blackout occurs

When a main switchboard blackout occurs, the 1st standby diesel generator will start and connect. If it fails to start or connect, the next standby diesel generator will start and connect. It is possible to configure the system to start more than one standby generator on blackout. Load dependent start and stop of stand-by generators

When a high load occurs on the connected generator(s), the 1st standby generator will start and connect. When the load decreases enough to let a generator disconnect without overloading the remaining, the 1st to stop generator will disconnect and stop. Control of heavy consumers start request and start granted

When a heavy consumer start request is received, the Power Management System will check for available power. • If enough power is available and a predefined number of generators are connected, the Power Management System gives a “start granted” to the consumer.

312401/B

347


• If enough power is not available, the standby generator(s) will automatically start and connect. When enough power is available, a “start granted” is given to the consumer. • When more than one heavy consumer sends a “request for start”, only one is granted at a time. The Power Management System remembers all start requests and enables them in sequence.

9.3 OS operational procedures 9.3.1 Overview The Power Management System is mainly operated through a colour display reflecting the ships power distribution system. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine, steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. A typical Power Management System display is shown below. Figure 159

348

Typical Power Management System Display

312401/B


9.3.2 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) 1


2

Use the trackball, point, and click with the left button on the main group for the: PMS /Power Management System. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: POWER MAN SYSTEM or PMS. • A window similar to the one shown in Typical Power Management System Display on page 348 will be opened. • Depending on the configuration, the text on the thumbnail and the appearance of the Power Management System display may vary.

9.3.3 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the TCP) 1

2

Use the fingertip and touch the main group for the: PMS/Power Management System. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: POWER

MAN SYSTEM or PMS

• A window similar to the one shown in Typical Power Management System Display on page 348 will be opened. • Depending on the configuration, the text on the thumbnail and the appearance of the Power Management System display may vary.

9.3.4 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker is called a generator set. (See Generator set symbol on page 350) The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set.

312401/B

349


Circuit breaker symbol: Figure 160

Generator set symbol

• Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm • In disconnected position: Grey: Open Yellow: Synchronizing/connecting

Circuit breaker symbol

• In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting

Generator symbol

(vs060229b)

Generator symbol: • Red dot: Generator alarm • Grey: Stopped

Prime mover symbol

• Green: Running, ready to connect Prime mover symbol: • Red dot: Prime mover alarm • Grey: Stopped • Grey and yellow: Starting • Green: Running • Green and yellow: Stopping

Generator set information box

Each generator set has an information box containing the following information: Figure 161

Generator set information box

AUTO Connected 1st to stop (3)

Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto Operational state of the generator set Stand-by status information (priority in brackets) Low load auto stop blocked Fuel selection/load control selection

(vs060230)

350

312401/B


How to display the control dialogue

1

Open the power management display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )

2

Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the generator set. This dialogue may vary according to the system configuration. • The illustration below shows a maximum configuration.

Figure 162

Control dialogue for generator set with start/stop (maximum configuration)

Information field Connect the generator

Disconnect the generator Stop the generator

Start the generator

Turn on/off the load dependent stop function

Set the generator to auto mode

Set the generator to semi-auto mode

Give the generator a higher priority

Give the generator a lower priority

Heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic

Diesel oil only Load setpoint confirmation

Frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500

Frequency and load control by the governor (vs060223)

Reset alarm messages

The most common generator set configuration for a control dialogue with start/stop is shown in figure: Common configuration of a control dialogue for generator set with start/stop on page 352.

312401/B

351


Figure 163 Common configuration of a control dialogue for generator set with start/stop

Semi-auto mode

In Semi-auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the function keys (softbuttons). The function keys are used to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to the load condition. Note

For Semi-auto mode the following applies: • A generator set must be started before it can be connected. • A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but the diesel will remain running. • The generator set will not be part of the stand-by system.

How to start a generator (Semi-auto mode)

1

Click on the Start softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.

How to connect a generator (Semi-auto mode) Note

This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed.

352

312401/B


1

Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

How to disconnect a generator (Semi-auto mode)

1

Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

How to stop a generator (Semi-auto mode) Note

This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected. 1

Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The text, cooling down, is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out, the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.

2

To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, click on the Stop softbutton twice.

Auto mode

In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting.

312401/B

353


Note

For Auto mode the following applies: • A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool-down and stop. • A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect and direct stop. • A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting, synchronizing and connect. • A start command will cause a starting sequence only. How to connect a generator (Auto mode) Note

This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. Or it is running ready to connect. 1

Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

How to disconnect a generator (Auto mode)

1

Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The text cool-down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out, the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping.

354

312401/B


• The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. 2

To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, click Stop twice.

How to stop a generator (Auto mode)

When the circuit breaker is connected: 1

Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. •

The prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping.

• The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This is a direct stop without cooling down period. When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1

Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The text, cooling down, is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After a cool-down time out, the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.

2

To stop the prime mover immediately without cooling down, click Stop twice.

How to start a generator (Auto mode)

1

Click on the Start softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.

312401/B

355


How to stop block On/Off (Auto mode)

1

To block the load dependent stop function, click on the On softbutton. • This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. • Stop blocked is indicated in the generator set information box.

2

To activate the load dependent stop function, click on the Off softbutton • This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.

How to prioritise the generators (higher/lower) (Auto mode)

The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. 1

Click on the Pri. Higher softbutton at the dialogue box, to give the generator set a higher stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is lowered by one.

2

Click on the Pri. Lower softbutton to give the generator set a lower stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is increased by one.

How to activate the heavy fuel oil (HFO) change over logic (Auto mode)

1

Click on the HFO softbutton to activate the heavy fuel oil change-over logic. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition.

How to run the prime mover on diesel oil (DO) (Auto mode)

1

Click on the DO softbutton to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic is not in use.

356

312401/B


How to select frequency and load control (Droop) by the K-Chief 500 (Auto mode)

1

Click on the Droop softbutton to select frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500. It is based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve (static).

How to select frequency and load control (Isochron) by the governor (Auto mode)

1

Click on the Isochron (Isochronous) softbutton to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.

How to reset alarm messages (Auto mode)

1

Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.

9.3.5 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control Note

Applicable for i.a. shaft generators. How to display the control dialogue

1

Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 )

2

Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing buttons to operate the generator set. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured. • The illustration below shows how the dialogue may look like.

312401/B

357


Figure 164 start/stop

Control dialogue for generator set without

How to connect the generator

1

Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

How to disconnect the generator

1

Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

How to reset alarm messages

1


358

312401/B


9.3.6 How to operate a generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint Note

Applicable for i.a. steam turbine generators. How to display the control dialogue

1


2

Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the generator set. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured. • The illustration below shows how the dialogue may look like.

Figure 165 Control dialogue for generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint

How to connect the generator

1

Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

312401/B

359


How to disconnect the generator

1

Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

How to insert load setpoint

1

Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box (Load setp. (%)). And type in the new setpoint value.

2

Click on the OK softbutton. • The generator will change the load according to the new setpoint.

How to reset alarm messages

1


9.3.7 How to operate the main switchboard controller Main switchboard controller symbols

The main switchboard is available with different layouts dependent on the system configuration. Underneath is three examples of how it may look like. Figure 166

Main switchboard controller, alternative 1 Available (spare) power

Frequency of generated power

Amount of power generated

Low load autostop blocked

(Vs060225)

Operational state (Red text indicates an alarm condition)

360

Status: Local/ Semi – Auto/Auto

Voltage of generated power

Symmetric/Asymmetric load sharing mode

312401/B


Figure 167

Main switchboard controller, alternative 2 Available (spar) power

(vs060226)

Frequency of generated power

Voltage of generated power

Figure 168

Amount of power generated

Main switchboard controller, alternative 3

(vs060227)

Available (spar) power

Operational state

How to display the control dialogue

1


2

Move the cursor to the main switchboard, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the main switchboard. • The illustration below shows the control dialogue, and what each of the softbuttons are used for.

312401/B

361


Figure 169

Control dialogue for the main switchboard Busbar information field

(vs060224)

Load sharing and mode information field Symmetric load sharing Asymmetric load sharing Semi auto mode Resets alarm messages Auto mode

Auto mode

1

Click on the Auto softbutton to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The stand-by and blackout recovery functions are in operation. • When the load increases above an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. • When the load decreases below an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the lowest priority number stops. • If a blackout situation occur, the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. • If a failure on a connected generator occurs, the generator with the highest priority starts. A change-over takes place.

Semi-Auto mode Note

This mode is used for commissioning purposes. Do not use for normal operation. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under the section above: Auto mode. Selecting Semi-auto will cause a Non Stand-by alarm. 1

Click on the Semi-auto softbutton to set the main switchboard controller in Semi-auto mode. • This will deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.

362

312401/B


Symmetric (Sym)

1

Click on the Sym softbutton for symmetric load sharing between the generators. • The load is shared equally between the generators.

Asymmetric (Asym)

1

Click on the Asym softbutton for asymmetric load sharing between two or more connected generators. When more than two generators are connected, the asymmetric load sharing is switched off automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. • The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: – Run one of the generators close to the high load limit of about 80 %. – Run the rest of the generators close to the low limit of 20 %. – After an adjustable period of time, the task of running on high load, rotates between the generators.

How to reset the main switchboard

1

Click on the Reset softbutton to reset the main switchboard controller when in state Operation Blocked, Remote Control.

9.3.8 How to operate a bus-tie breaker Note

The control dialogue is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. How to display the control dialogue

1


2

Move the cursor to the bus-tie breaker, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the bus-tie breaker . This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured.

312401/B

363


• The illustration below shows an example of how a control dialogue for the bus-tie breaker may look like. Figure 170

Control dialogue for the bus-tie breaker

How to connect

1

Click on the Connect softbutton. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the bus-tie breaker is connected.

How to disconnect

1

Click on the Disconnect softbutton. • The bus-tie breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the bus-tie breaker is unloading. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the bus-tie breaker is disconnected.

How to reset

1

Click on the Reset softbutton to reset PMS any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.

9.3.9 How to operate the one-touch auto sequence One-touch auto sequence controller symbol

On the Power Management System display is a dialogue which indicates the current state of the operation. Underneath is a figure which illustrates how the dialogue may look like.

364

312401/B


Figure 171 One-touch auto sequence symbol, indicating current state of operation

To simplify the Power Management System, one-touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined configurations by clicking on a softbutton. See How to display the control dialogue on page 365. How to display the control dialogue Note

The control dialogue is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. 1


2

Move the cursor to the one-touch auto sequence symbol, and click on it. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the one-touch auto sequence . This dialogue will vary according to which of the one-touch auto sequences who are configured. • The illustration below shows what each of the softbuttons are used for.

Figure 172

One-touch auto sequence dialogue box

(vs060228)

Predefined modes

Abort the selected mode

Reset

312401/B

365


How to select modes

1

Click on the softbutton for the desired mode. • The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode.

9.4 MOS operational procedures 9.4.1 User interface The Power Management System is mainly operated through a colour display reflecting the ship’s power distribution system. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine, steam turbine or the main engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. A typical Power Management System display is shown below. Figure 173

Typical Power Management System display

Note

Depending on the system configuration the appearance of the Midi Operator Station (MOS) display pictures may vary.

366

312401/B


9.4.2 How to operate the main switchboard controller How to open the Power Management System display

1

Push Menu to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed.

2

Push 2 to display the Tag Selection Menu. (Or display the Tag Selection Menu by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text, Tag Selection Menu, and push ENTER.)

3

Push 2 to display the PMS Menu. (Or display the PMS Menu by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text, PMS Menu, and push ENTER.)

4

Push 1 to display Tag Overview. (Or display the Tag Overview by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text, Power Manager, and push ENTER.)

5

Push Enter and the Power Management System display will be shown.

How to open the main switchboard controller display

1

Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.

2

Use the navigator key to move the cursor to mark the wanted switchboard.

3

Push Enter to select it. • A display showing the switchboard appears.

4

If the text, Enable commands, appear on the left side of the F4 function key, push the F4 function key to activate the functionality. • This is a password protection function

312401/B

367


5

Type inn the password. • The text for the function keys will now appear on the right side of the display. (See figure Generator set with start stop control on page 371.) Figure 174

6

Typical main switchboard controller display

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the switchboard is configured.

7

Push the function key for the desired function.

The following functions are available: • Symmetric • Asymmetric • Connect more power (Connect more pwr) • Disconnect surplus power (Disconn surplus pwr) • Stop block on • Stop block off • Reset • Auto • Semi-auto Note

If there are more than four functions on the left side of the display, use the page up/page down keys to display them.

368

312401/B


Symmetric

1

Push the function key beside the text, Symmetric, for a symmetric load sharing between the generators. • The load is shared equally between the generators.

Asymmetric

1

Push the function key beside the text, Asymmetric, for an asymmetric load sharing between two or more connected generators. When more than two generators are connected, the asymmetric load sharing is switched off automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. • The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: – Run one of the generators close to the high load limit of about 80 %. – Run the rest of the generators close to the low limit of 20 %. – After an adjustable period of time, the task of running on high load, rotates between the generators.

Reset

1

Push the function key beside the text, Reset, to reset the main switchboard controller when it is in state Operation Blocked, Remote Control.

Auto mode

1

Push the function key beside the text, Auto, to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The stand-by and blackout recovery functions are in operation. • When the load increases above an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the highest priority will start. • When the load decreases below an adjustable limit, the stand-by generator with the lowest priority will stop. • If a blackout situation occur, the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. • If a failure on a connected generator occurs, the generator with the highest priority starts. A change-over takes place.

312401/B

369


Semi-auto mode Note

This mode is used for commissioning purposes. Do not use for normal operation. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under the section above: Auto mode. Selecting Semi-auto will cause a Non Stand-by alarm.

9.4.3 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control Generator set symbol colour interpretation

A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen below) is called a generator set. The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set. Circuit breaker symbol: Figure 175

Generator set symbol

Circuit breaker symbol

Generator symbol

(vs060229b)

Prime mover symbol

• Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm • In disconnected position: Grey: Open Yellow: Synchronizing/connecting • In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting Protection symbol: • Red dot: Protection alarm • Green: OK Generator symbol: • Red dot: Generator alarm • Grey: Stopped • Green: Running, ready to connect Prime mover symbol: • Red dot: Prime mover alarm • Grey: Stopped • Grey and yellow: Starting • Green: Running • Green and yellow: Stopping

370

312401/B


How to open the generator set control display

1

Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display, see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.)

2

Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control.

3

Push Enter to select the generator. • The display shows now the selected generator set

4

If the text, Enable commands, appear on the left side of the F4 function key, push the F4 function key to activate the functionality. • This is a password protection function

5

Type inn the password. • The text for the function keys will now appear on the right side of the display. (See figure Generator set with start stop control on page 371.)

Figure 176

6

Generator set with start stop control

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all the available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.

7


The following functions are available: • Connect • Disconnect

312401/B

371


• Reset • Start • Stop • Auto • Semi-auto • Stop block on • Stop block off • Pri. higher • Pri. lower • Load setpoint • HFO on • HFO off • Droop • Isochronous How to display detailed information

The following detailed information displays are available: • Generator frequency • Generator voltage • Generator current • Generator load • Generator relative load • Power factor 1

Open the generator set control display to select a generator set. (For information on opening the display see: How to open the generator set control display on page 371.)

• The detailed information can be found by selecting from the options shown to the left. And can be found on the left side of the generator set display.

2

372

Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the option for the wanted information.

312401/B


3

Push Enter to select. • A display showing the selected detailed display is opened. • Underneath is a figure showing a display of the frequency.

Figure 177

4

Frequency display

Push Enter once more to display a tag details view for this tag. • A display showing the tag details view is shown. The following figure is a tag details view of a frequency tag.

Figure 178

5

Tag details view for a frequency tag

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all the available information.

How to open the Generator Protection display

All marine generators must be protected according to the rules of the classification societies. By following the procedure underneath, the list of monitored functions will be displayed.

312401/B

373


1

Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the text, Protection. (It can be located at the right side of the generator set symbol. See Generator set without start/stop on page 380)

2

Push Enter to select the Generator Protection display.

A list of monitored functions are displayed. These are: • Short Circuit • Over Current • Reverse Power • Diff. Current • Voltage • OverLoad • Frequency • VAr import/export Each of these is indicated by a coloured dot. The interpretation of the colours are: • Green dot: OK • Red dot: Alarm • Blue dot: Inhibited • Grey dot: Function not active • Orange dot: Invalid In addition to the list of monitored functions, the following information is available at the end of the list: • Current Measurement • Voltage Measurement • Frequency Measurement 1

Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the function/information you want.

2

Push Enter to select.

Semi-auto mode

In Semi-auto mode the operator control the generator set using the function keys to start or stop, connect or disconnect it according to the load condition.

374

312401/B


Note

For Semi-auto mode the following applies: • A generator set must be started before it can be connected. • A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator. But the diesel will remain running. • The generator set will not be part of the stand-by system.

How to start a generator (Semi-auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Start. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.

How to connect a generator (Semi-auto mode)

This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed. 1

Push the function key for Connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

How to disconnect a generator (Semi-auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

How to stop a generator (Semi-auto mode)

This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected.

312401/B

375


1

Push the function key for Stop. • The text cool-down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.

2

To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push the function key for Stop twice.

Auto mode

In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting. Note

For Auto mode the following applies: • A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect, cool-down and stop. • A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading, disconnect and direct stop. • A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting, synchronizing and connect. • A start command will cause a starting sequence only.

How to connect a generator (Auto mode)

This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. 1

Push the function key for Connect. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

376

312401/B


How to disconnect a generator (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The text cool-down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.

2

To stop the prime mover immediately, without cooling down, push the function key for Stop twice.

How to stop a generator (Auto mode)

When the circuit breaker is connected: 1

Push the function key for Stop. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. This is a direct stop without cooling down period.

When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1

Push the function key for Stop. • The text cooling down is displayed. This means that the generator set is cooling down. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped.

2

312401/B

To stop the prime mover immediately, push Stop twice.

377


How to start a generator (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Start. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means it is starting. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect.

Stop block On/Off (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Stop block on to block the load dependent stop function. • This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.

2

Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the load dependent stop function. • This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard.

How to prioritize higher/lower (Pri. higher/lower) (Auto mode)

The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. 1

Push the function key for Pri. Higher to give the generator set a higher stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is lowered by one.

2

Push the function key for Pri. Lower to give the generator set a lower stand-by priority. • The indicated stand-by number is increased by one.

How to activate the heavy fuel oil (HFO) change-over logic (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for HFO (heavy fuel oil) to activate the heavy fuel oil change-over logic. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil, but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition.

378

312401/B


How to run the prime mover only on diesel oil. (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic is not in use.

How to activate frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500 (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500. It is based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve.

How to activate frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Isochron (Isochronous) to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.

Reset (Auto mode)

1

Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. • Before resetting any alarm, rectify the problem, if any.

9.4.4 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control Note

Applicable for i.a. shaft generators. How to open the generator set display

312401/B

1


2


379


3

Push Enter to select the generator. • The display shows now the selected generator set, and text for the function keys appear on the right side. (See figure Generator set without start/stop on page 380.)

Figure 179

4

Generator set without start/stop

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.

5


The following functions are available: • Connect • Disconnect • Reset Connect

1

Push the function key for Connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • When the shaft generator is synchronizing, the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

380

312401/B


Disconnect

1

Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • When the shaft generator is unloading, the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

Reset

1


9.4.5 How to operate a generator set without start/stop, but with adjustable load setpoint Note

Applicable for i.a. steam turbine generators. How to open the generator set display

1


2


3

Push Enter to select the generator. • The display shows now the selected generator set, and text for the function keys appear on the right side.

4

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.

5


The following functions are available:

312401/B

381


• Connect • Disconnect • Load setp. • Reset Connect

1

Push the function key for Connect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. This means that the generator is connected.

Disconnect

1

Push the function key for Disconnect. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is disconnected.

Load setp.

1

Push the function key for Load setp. (If the function key is not available, use the page up/page down keys to display it.) • A dialogue appears.

2

Use the alphanumeric keys to type inn the wanted value.

3

Push enter.

Reset

1


9.4.6 How to operate a bus-tie breaker How to open the bus-tie breaker display Note

The bus-tie breaker display is project specific and may vary from the illustration below.

382

312401/B


1


2

Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the bus tie breaker you want to control.

3

Push Enter to select the bus-tie breaker. • The display shows now the selected bus-tie breaker, and text for the function keys appear on the right side.

Figure 180

Bus-tie breaker display

4

Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys.

5

Push the function key for the desired mode. • The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode.

Connect

1

Push the function key for Connect. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is connected, and turns green. This means that the bus-tie breaker is connected.

312401/B

383


Disconnect

1

Push the function key for Disconnect. • The bus-tie breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the bus-tie breaker is unloading. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected, and turns grey. This means that the bus-tie breaker is disconnected.

Reset

1


384

312401/B

Reference Guide

10 REFERENCE GUIDE 10.1 Overview This document gives an overview of parameters that can be inspected and adjusted from an Operator Station. Where applicable other parameter details are included. The following subjects are covered: • Overview of tag types • Alarm and monitoring parameters • Engineer’s safety

312401/B

385


10.2 Tag types Overview

The following is a list of available tag types in the K-Chief 500 system. Note

This is a general list of tags. Your system may therefore not have all the mentioned tags. A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on a Distributed Processing Unit. A channel is where a signal is physically connected to a Distributed Processing Unit. The tag type defines which application to run on the signal. Example: If channel no. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module (RAi-16) is tag type 20, the input signal is 4-20 mA. Basic tag types

386

Tag type number

Channel type

0

Undefined type

1

Voltage ± 0.1

2

Voltage ± 1

3

Voltage ± 5

4

Voltage ± 10

6

Voltage 0 - 1

7

Voltage 0 - 1

8

Voltage 0 - 5

9

Voltage 0 - 10

11

Milliamps ± 1

12

Milliamps ± 5

13

Milliamps ± 10

14

Milliamps ± 20

16

Milliamps 0 - 1

17

Milliamps 0 - 5

18

Milliamps 0 - 10

19

Milliamps 0 - 20

20

Milliamps 4 - 20

22

PT 50

23

PT 100

24

PT 1000

26

Potmeter 1 K

312401/B

Reference Guide

312401/B

Tag type number

Channel type

27

Potmeter 5 K

29

On-off without check (RAi-16)

30

On-off single check (RAi-16)

31

On-off double check (RAi-16)

32

RDi-32 digital input

34

Counter event

35

Counter frequency

36

Counter time

38

TC element

40

AC voltage 10 bit

41

AC current 10 bit

43

Generator frequency

44

Bus frequency

45

Phase difference

46

Cosine phi

47

Phase velocity

49

Pick up

128

Exhaust mean

129

Exhaust deviation

130

Rio PLC type

131

DO (digital out) 401 client

132

DOT (digital out) handler

133

AO (analogue out) 401 client

134

AO (analogue out) handler

135

Exhaust deviation limit

136

Alarm relay

137

Local alarm system

141

Rotating light handler

142

ASCII IO handler

143

SSC IO handler

144

DS 401 handler

150

Dead man handler

200

Serial AI

201

Serial DI

255

System tag handler

387


Analogue output tags

Tag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines the analogue output channel type. If the Distributed Processing Unit type is a Remote Analogue Output module, the following analogue output channel types are available: Channel type number

Channel type

0

0 - 10.0 Volt

1

±10.0 Volt

2

0 - 5.0 Volt

3

±5.0 Volt

4

0 - 20.0 mA

5

4 - 20.0 mA

Relays

Binary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Output module. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module are automatically an output channel type.

388

312401/B

Reference Guide

10.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters 10.3.1 Analogue input tag items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Enable Gradient Alarm

Yes/no

Yes

Enable/disable alarm

Enable Alarm Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Alarm Low Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Alarm High

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Alarm High High

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event Low Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event High

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event High High

Yes/no

Yes


Gradient Block Limit

Number

Yes

Block if measured value is < block limit

Gradient Limit

Number

Yes

Gradient alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit


Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit


Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes


Dynamic Dead Band

Number

Yes


Counts Low

Number

Yes

A/D minimum value

Counts High

Number

Yes

A/D maximum value

Eng. Units Low

Number

Yes


Eng. Units High

Number

Yes


Raw Value

Number

No

Measured raw value directly from ADC

Raw Percent Value

Number

No

Measured raw value in % of range

Scaled Value

Number

No

Measured value scaled to technical value

Filtered Value

Number

No

Filtered scaled value

Function

Some of the parameters are further explained below.

312401/B

389


Enable alarms and events

Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of the enable parameters. Select YES for enable, NO for disable. Gradient parameters

The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. In order to make the gradient more robust against noise, it is calculated based on a moving average over the three last samples of the filtered value. When the process value falls below the block limit, the gradient alarm will be blocked. Above this process value, the gradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceeds the gradient limit. • Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits the gradient alarm. • Gradient limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradient value (in units/sec) exceeds this limit. Alarm and event limits

Alarm and event limits are entered in technical units. Each alarm and event limit has its own enable flag. If the enable flag is set, the alarm/event status will be updated. If the enable flag is not set, the corresponding status is cleared. The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and four event limits. The alarm and event status is updated as following (if the enable flag is set): 1

LL= on, if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit

2

L = on, if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit

3

H = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit

4

HH = on, if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit

5

Ev_1 = on, if Filtered_value > event_1 limit

6


7


8


The LL, L, H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarm delay has expired. Filter time

The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. The scaled process value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant, which defines the cut-off frequency for the filter. The time constant resolution is 0.1 seconds. A time constant = 0 disables the filter, hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constant set to 0.1 seconds.

390

312401/B

Reference Guide

Dynamic dead band

The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with the same number of decimals as specified for the process value. The dynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tag parameter is set to YES. This parameter is used for dynamic update of the process value for external tag users. When the process value becomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than the dynamic dead-band, a new value is sent. Scaling parameters

The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs of technical values and measured values read from the analogue to digital converter. The technical sensor range is: Eng. Units High – Eng. Units Low The instrument range is: Counts High – Counts Low Figure 181

Scaling parameters

Measured values

Each channel is sampled from a 16 bit analogue to digital converter every 10 milliseconds. The result of this sampling is a value in the range 0 to 65535 counts. Depending on the type of signal connected, the legal count range may be less. The table below shows the count range for the different signal types available:

312401/B

391


Code

Short Text

Counts High

Counts Low

1

VOLT_PM_01

45874

19660

2

VOLT_PM_1

45874

19660

3

VOLT_PM_5

45874

19660

4

VOLT_PM_10

58981

6553

6

VOLT_0_01

45874

32767

7

VOLT_0_1

45874

32767

8

VOLT_0_5

45874

32767

9

VOLT_0_10

58981

32767

11

MA_PM_1

58981

6553

12

MA_PM_5

39321

26214

13

MA_PM_10

45874

19660

14

MA_PM_20

58981

6553

16

MA_0_1

58981

32767

17

MA_0_5

39321

32767

18

MA_0_10

45874

32767

19

MA_0_20

58981

32767

20

MA_4_20

58981

38010

22

PT_50

See 1)

See 1)

23

PT_100

See 1)

See 1)

24

PT_1000

See 1)

See 1)

26

POT_1K

See 2)

See 2)

27

POT_5K

See 2)

See 2)

1

The RTD elements are automatically calculated based on interpolation with values fetched from a pre-defined table. The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.

2

The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculated based on a conversion algorithm. The count scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable.

The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of the analogue to digital converter. By using the scaling parameters the Scaled Value is calculated, and from this value the raw percent value is calculated (± 100.00). The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order Butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value.

392

312401/B

Reference Guide

10.3.2 Counter input tag items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Enable Alarm Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Alarm Low Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Alarm High

Yes/no

Yes



Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event Low Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event High

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event High High

Yes/no

Yes


Limit Alarm Low Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Alarm High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit


Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Limit Event Low Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event Low

Number

Yes

Event limit

Limit Event High

Number

Yes

Event limit


Number

Yes

Event limit

Filter Time

Number

Yes


Filter Index

Number

Yes

Counter input pin filter

Time Base

Number

Yes

Counting time code: ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr=3

Pulses Per Eng. Units

Number

Yes

Pulses per engineering unit

Raw Value

Number

No

Measured raw value directly from counter

Scaled Value

Number

No

Measured value scaled to technical value

Filtered Value

Number

No

Filtered scaled value

Dynamic Dead Band

Number

No


Function

Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below. Counter input parameters Filter index

When using the counter as an event counter, it is possible to filter the counter input signal with a digital filter in order to avoid contact noise to be counted. The Filter index parameter specifies the digital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.

312401/B

Filter index

Cut-off frequency

0

1 Hz

393


Filter index

Cut-off frequency

1

5 Hz

2

10 Hz

3

50 Hz

4

100 Hz

5

500 Hz

6

Disabled

Time base

When using the counter for frequency or time measurements, the Time base parameter specifies in which time unit the measurement shall be calculated. The following values are available: Time base

Time unit

0

Milliseconds

1

Seconds

2

Minutes

3

Hours

Note

Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequency mode. Pulses per Eng. Unit

When using the counter in frequency measurement mode, the scaling algorithm needs to know the number of pulses generated by the counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified by the Pulses per Eng Unit parameter. Pulses per engineering unit is for instance: • 10 pulses per litre (flow rate) • 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM) • 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed) Counter input measured values Raw value

This value is read directly from the counter. In the event counting mode, this value is the same as the scaled value.

394

312401/B

Reference Guide

Scaled value

In the event counting mode, the Scaled value is the same as the raw value. In the frequency counting mode, the Scaled value is calculated from the raw value using the Pulses per Eng Units and the Time base parameters. In time mode, only the Time base parameter is used to calculate the Scaled value. Filtered value

The Scaled value is used as input to the 2nd order Butterworth filter to produce the Filtered value.

312401/B

395


10.3.3 Digital input tag items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

On delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 100 milliseconds

Off delay

Number

Yes

Delay in 100 milliseconds

Enable Alarm Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Alarm High

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event Low

Yes/no

Yes


Enable Event High

Yes/no

Yes


Invert

Yes/no

Yes

Invert input status

Input value

Number

No

Input status before time delay

Delayed input

Number

No


Function

Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below. Digital input parameters Delays

Digital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevant transitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal must be stable before the new input value is accepted. The delay time is specified in units of 100 milliseconds. The value 20 means a delay of 2 seconds. Invert

The input value can be used directly or inverted before use. Specify YES to invert the input signal. Input values

Input status both before and after time delay is available.

396

312401/B

Reference Guide

10.3.4 Exhaust mean value tag items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Mean Temperature High High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Enable Alarm High

Yes/no

Yes

Alarm enable/disable


Yes/no

Yes

Alarm enable/disable

Mean Temperature High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Mean Temperature Block

Number

Yes

Alarm blocking limit

Deviation Temperature High

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Deviation Temperature Low

Number

Yes

Alarm limit

Cylinder 1 Temperature

Number

Yes

Temperature tag number reference


Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes



Number

Yes


Dynamic Alarm Limit

Number

No

Deviation alarm limit

Mean Temperature

Number

No

Calculated mean temperature

Function

Exhaust mean value parameters Mean temperature high high/Enable alarm high high

If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES, the mean temperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high high limit.

312401/B

397


Mean temperature high

The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high limit. Dynamic deviation alarm limit

Alarm limit at current mean temperature. Mean temperature block/Deviation temperature high/Deviation temperature low

If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature block limit, all deviation alarms are inhibited. The Deviation temperature low limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder, when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature block limit. The Deviation temperature high limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder, when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature high alarm limit. The actual deviation alarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinder uses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives a graphical illustration of the different parameters.

398

312401/B

Reference Guide

Figure 182

Exhaust mean value parameters

Cylinder 1 – 16 temperature

The Cylinder (1–16) temperature parameters are tag number references for each cylinder’s temperature measurement. Only the cylinder references that are in use, are used for calculating the mean temperature. Mean temperature

The Mean temperature is calculated as an average of all the cylinders specified in the cylinder temperature reference parameters. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail are not used in the calculation.

312401/B

399


10.3.5 Exhaust deviation tag items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Correction Temperature

Number

Yes

Correction temperature

Cylinder Temperature Reference

Number

Yes

This temperature tag number

Normalized Temperature

Number

No

Measured temperature + temperature correction

Function

There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder. This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature against the deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust mean temperature tag item, and activates the exhaust deviation alarm if the normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range. Exhaust deviation parameters Correction temperature

Each cylinder’s Correction temperature is calculated only on request from the operator. This is normally done when the engine is running in steady state at 100 % load. The reason for using a correction temperature is that all cylinders have their own normal operating temperatures, which mostly are not equal to the engine mean temperature. By adding the correction temperature to the real cylinder temperature, the cylinder temperature is normalised, so that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. The correction temperature is calculated in the following way: Correction_temperature = Meantemp - RealCylindertemp

Cylinder temperature reference

The Cylinder temperature reference parameter is a tag number reference to the each cylinder’s temperature. Normalised temperature

The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way: Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp + Correction_temp

This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checking against the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm.

400

312401/B

Reference Guide

10.3.6 Common sub-menu items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Tag type

Number

Yes

RIO channel type

Decimal point

Number

Yes

Fixed point location for tag analogue value

External tag

Yes/no

No

Yes if tag is used by some other tag

Text

No

Tag’s global name

Tag name

Function

Common sub-menu parameters Tag type

The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal is handled and scaled. There are 255 different codes available. Decimal point

Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value. The number 234.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423 and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostly have decimal point 1. Tag name

The External tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used by another module. Most control applications are external. The tag’s value will be automatically transmitted for external use. The Tag name parameter is the global tag name.

312401/B

401


10.3.7 Alarm sub-menu items Parameter name

Type

Adjustable

Alarm On Delay1

Number

Yes

High/low delay off (1 second)

Alarm Off Delay1

Number

Yes

High/low delay off (1 second)

Alarm On Delay2

Number

Yes

High high/low low delay off (1 second)

Alarm Off Delay2

Number

Yes

High high/low low delay off (1 second)

Inhibit On Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay on (1 second)

Inhibit Off Delay

Number

Yes

Inhibit delay off (1 second)

Inhibit Tag

Number

Yes

Tag number to inhibit this channel

Function

Alarm and inhibit delays

There are separate parameters for alarm delay On and Off, as well as delay of inhibit On and Off. When the condition for alarm or inhibit is changed, a timer is started. The new condition must be stable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the new alarm condition is accepted, and an event is issued. Delays are specified in seconds. Inhibit parameters Tag number

Specifies the tag number to check status for. The specified tag number’s external parameter must be set to activate the Process Data Object (PDO) transmission on changes.

402

312401/B

Reference Guide

10.4 Engineer’s safety 10.4.1 Purpose The Engineer’s safety system (dead man system) is a system for engineer fitness. When activated, the reset button must be pressed by the engineer within a pre-defined time period. If not, the system will indicate “Engineer fitness alarm”.

10.4.2 Functions • Start, stop and reset from push-buttons • Control from the Operator Station • Warning light activated by relay • Alarm horn activated by relay • Range check of timers according to IMO rules When active, the system will activate a rotating light after expired time delay. The engineer must now reset the system. If the system is not reset within a new time period, the system will activate an alarm. Reset can be pressed at any time. The system will typically be activated from the Operator Station by selected alarms when running an unattended engine room.

10.4.3 Local control The system is activated and de-activated manually by a key-switch. The system can also be activated automatically from the alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs during unattended engine room. A number of reset push-buttons are located around the ship.

10.4.4 Operator Station control When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the engineer safety handler is activated. The timers are reset every time activated. The timers are not reset by the command from the Operator Station, if already running.

10.4.5 Parameters Parameter name

Type

Tag1: Start

Number

Yes

Start/on digital input Tag reference

N/A

Tag 1

Tag2: Stop

Number

Yes

Stop/off digital input Tag reference

N/A

Tag 2

Tag3: Reset

Number

Yes

Reset digital input Tag reference

N/A

Tag 3

312401/B

Adjustable

Function

Initial value

Parameter reference

403


Parameter name

Type

Tag4: On Watch

Number

Yes

Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that someone is set on Watch

N/A

Tag 4

Tag5: New Alarm

Number

Yes

Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that a new alarm is activated

N/A

Tag 5

T1: Warning time

Number

Yes

Time from reset or start until warning is activated

20 min

P1

T2: Alarm time

Number

Yes

Time from warning is activated until alarm

150 s

P2

S1: IMO Compliant

Yes/no

Yes

Enable check timers according to IMO rules for machinery dead man system

Yes

B1

Adjustable

Function

Initial value

Parameter reference

Tags 4 and 5 are used when the dead man handler is part of the Watch Calling System at the Operator Station. The tag then pointed to by tag 4 is active when the Watch Calling System is set to bridge watch. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch, the tag pointed to by tag 5 will be activated, and this will activate the dead man handler in the same way as if tag 1 was activated. The decimal point is 0.

404

312401/B

Maintenance

11 MAINTENANCE 11.1 Introduction The on-board maintenance of the K-Chief 500 system involves both preventive and corrective maintenance. Due to the lack of moving parts, the maintenance actions performed by the operator is very limited. Only the preventive and corrective actions performed by the operator is described in this manual. This consists of the following: • Cleaning monitors, panels, cabinets, air filters etc. • Running on-line tests • Replacing fuses

312401/B

405


11.2 Preventive maintenance 11.2.1 Maintenance schedule Preventive maintenance routines must be performed regularly and effectively to ensure that the equipment is kept in top condition. Kongsberg Maritime recommends the following preventive maintenance schedule for the Alarm and Monitoring System: • Weekly – None. • 6-monthly – Check cables and cable entrances, electrical screw-terminals, fuse connections and plug connections. • Yearly – Check and, if necessary, calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Kongsberg Maritime recommends that the operation of each unit and its functions is checked after any major maintenance. By major maintenance is understood the removing, testing, calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressure sensors, temperature sensors etc. After this type of maintenance, we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to the instruction given in the relevant maintenance manual. Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance Plan (or Site’s Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring points and of the alarm system. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthly to 6-monthly schedule.

11.2.2 Weekly maintenance This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons. Pushing function test buttons will not interrupt normal system operation. Do the following: Operator Stations and Operator Panels

Each week, do the following for each Operator Station and Operator Panel: 1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water not too wet. Note

Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning solutions is not recommended as these may damage the unit.

406

312401/B

Maintenance

2

3

Push LAMP TEST. • All alarm groups and the system failure indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds. • If the test fails, refer to the troubleshooting section in the relevant maintenance manual. If the unit is fitted with an air filter, clean it. • If any additional preventive maintenance procedures are to be carried out, refer to the description in the relevant manufacturer’s manual.

Midi Operator Station

Each week, do the following for each Midi Operator Station: 1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and display screen using a clean damp cloth. For heavier cleaning, use a clean, damp cloth which has been dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water. Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. Note

Never use cleaning solutions containing spirit or alcohol. Watch Calling System

Each week, do the following for each Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Unit: 1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm, mild soapy water - not too wet. 2 Push LAMP TEST. 3 All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on. The display (if any) should display configuration data. • If the test fails, refer to the troubleshooting section in the relevant maintenance manual. • If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent, replace the unit, as described in the relevant maintenance manual. Distributed Processing Units

This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons. Hence, the Distributed Processing Units do not require weekly maintenance.

11.2.3 6–monthly maintenance Where applicable, check the following parts of the system each 6-months period: 1 Check cables and cable entrances for damage to the cable.

312401/B

407


2

Tighten all electrical screw terminals.

3

Tighten all plug connections.

11.2.4 Yearly maintenance Each year, check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. In general, it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signal is unchanged. Compare the input signal to this system, with the input signals on other systems or local gauges. Sensors can be calibrated in two ways; by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself, or by calibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built into the K-Chief 500. The calibration software is accessible from the Tag Details menu on the Operator Station, or from the Midi Operator Station when available.

408

312401/B

Maintenance

11.3 Corrective maintenance Corrective maintenance procedures must be performed to replace faulty parts in the event of a system malfunction. The corrective maintenance performed by the operator is limited to replacement of defective fuses. For all other corrective maintenance, refer to the K-Chief 500 Maintenance Manual or other relevant manufacturer’s manuals.

312401/B

409


11.4 Built In Self-Test (BIST) Note

The K-Chief 500 is a modular system, and for a specific project configuration the DPU models used will vary. The DPUs referred to in this section will therefore not always reflect the operator’s system.

11.4.1 How to handle DPU error codes All Distributed Processing Units have a Built-In Self-Test (BIST) functionality. These tests report errors to the Operator Stations on the system channel. The following table gives an overview of the error codes and gives appropriate actions to be taken: Error code

Error description

Action

49

RAM fail

Replace the module.

48

Transmitter overcurrent (RAi-16 and C1 modules)

Check all channels for high current load.

47

Fuse fail (RDi-32 and C1 modules)

Check all inputs.

46

CPU Board temperature high

Check the ambient temperature.

45

Configuration fail

Value = Config fail channel *64 + 45. Tag details gives detailed information.

44

dPSC link failure

dPSC only.

42

EEPROM read failure

C3 and C4 only.

41

Slave CPU application change-over

dPSC only. The Master CPU has most probably lost communication with one ore more of its local DPUs.

CAN 1 — plug X8 40

CAN controller bus off

39

CAN controller error status set

38

CAN controller overrun

37

Rx queue overrun

36

HP Tx queue overrun

35

LP Tx queue overrun

34

Transmit fault

Check CAN connections.

CAN 1 — plug X9

410

312401/B

Maintenance

Error code

Error description

Action

30

CAN controller bus off

Check CAN connections.

29

CAN controller error status set

28

CAN controller overrun

27

Rx queue overrun

26

HP Tx queue overrun

25

LP Tx queue overrun

24

Transmit fault

11.4.2 RIO-C3 7–segment display In independent systems without an external man-machine interface, a 7–segment display on the RIO-C3 Generator Protection module indicates trip information and status. Figure 183

RIO-C3 7–segment display

Use the following table to decode the 7–segment display on the module if a trip is activated: 1. digit = code for function

2. digit = code for phase

3. digit = code for level

0

Not used

0

No phase defined

0

No level defined

1

Short circuit

1

L1 or L1–L2

1

Level 1 or Low or (VAR) import

2

Overcurrent

2

L2 or L1–L3

2

Level 2 or Low Low

3

Reverse power

3

L3 or L2–L3

3

Level 3 or High or (VAR) export

312401/B

411


1. digit = code for function

2. digit = code for phase

3. digit = code for level

4

Differential current

4

Not used

4

Level 4 or High High

5

Voltage

5

Not used

5

Not used

6

Overload

6

Not used

6

Not used

7

Frequency

7

Not used

7

Not used

8

VAR

8

Not used

8

Not used

9

Not used

9

Not used

9

Not used

11.4.3 How to handle DPU communication errors If the Operator Station gives a communication error for one of the Distributed Processing Units, the LEDs on the front panel of the DPU in question must be checked. Figure 184

DPU front panel LED indicators (typical)

Power indicator

1

Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given.

2

Check the power LED indicator and, if applicable, perform corrective actions according to the table below.

Power mode

Power LED

Corrective actions

Power OK

Green

None.

412

312401/B

Maintenance

Power mode

Power LED

Corrective actions

Power with wrong polarity

Red

Correct the power polarity and check again. If the Power indicator is still red, replace the DPU.

No power

Dark

Check power supply and wiring. If the power supply and wiring is OK, replace the DPU.

Fuse failure indicators

Analogue and digital inputs are protected by internal circuit breakers. Short-circuiting due to faulty sensors and/or damaged wires are indicated by the DPU. Note that these indicators are only available for the DPUs listed in this section. Indication of fuse failure can either be for multiple channels simultaneously (typically displayed by a LED mounted in the vicinity of the power LED) or for separate channels (displayed by the LED also giving channel status). See the tables below for details. 1


2

Check the fuse failure indicator(s) and, if applicable, perform corrective actions according to the tables below.

Multiple channels Applicable for RDi-32 (digital channels 1 to 32), RIO-CI (digital channels 16-19) Channel mode

Fuse blown LED

Corrective actions

All channels are OK

Dark

None.

24 V to all digital channels is broken

Red

Isolate the fault by first pulling out one by one terminal block. After finding the relevant terminal block, unscrew wires for each sensor until the faulty sensor has been identified. Replace the sensor. If sensors with wiring are OK, replace the DPU.

Separate channels Applicable for RAi-16 (analogue channels 1 to 16), RIO-CI (analogue channels 12-15) Channel mode

Fuse blown LED

Corrective actions

Inactive channel

Dark

None.

24 V fuse is broken

Red

Disconnect 10–20 sec. If the sensor with wiring is OK, replace the DPU.

Separate channels Applicable for RIO-C2 (digital channels 9 to 16), RIO-C4 (digital channels 9 to 12) Channel mode

Fuse blown LED

Corrective actions

Inactive channel

Dark

None.

312401/B

413


Separate channels Applicable for RIO-C2 (digital channels 9 to 16), RIO-C4 (digital channels 9 to 12) Channel mode

Fuse blown LED

Corrective actions

Active channel

Green

None.

24 V is broken

Red

Unscrew the sensor connected to the reported channel. Replace the sensor. If the sensor with wiring is OK, replace the DPU.

Status indicators

1


2

Check each status LED indicator and, if applicable, perform corrective actions according to the table below.

Operational mode

Run LED

Watch Dog LED

Info. LED

End Init. LED

Corrective actions

Normal operation

Green

Dark

Flashing yellow

Green

The unit seems to be working OK. Check the cabling. Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. If the Operator Station is still reporting an error replace the DPU.

No application loaded

Dark

Red

Dark

Green

This indicates that the Distributed Processing Unit has boot software installed, but no basic software. Use the Rio load program to install the appropriate software.

Not initialised

Dark

Red

Dark

Dark

Return the item to Kongsberg Maritime.

Application stopped

Dark

Red

Dark

Green

Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the DPU.

414

312401/B

Index

A About password access MOS, 245 Access control, 78 Access control system CRP, 138 TCP, 201 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) description, 55 Alarm and event limits, 390 Alarm and inhibit delays, 402 Alarm and monitoring display, 77 Alarm and Monitoring System Access control system, 138, 201 Hhow to define the engineer qualifications, 221 Hhw to display system information, 137 how alarms are printed after a black-out, 116–117, 182 how to access the Watch Calling Configuration, 155, 218 how to acknowledge alarms, 116 how to call officers, 157, 219 how to change Deviation parameters, 152, 215 how to change list of tags in Selected Points group, 134, 197 how to change system time, 146, 209 how to change tag parameters for a channel, 148, 211 how to change time zone, 145, 208 how to configure Event Log, 132 how to configure the Autolog, 135, 199 how to configure the Event Log, 195 how to configure the Noonlog, 136, 199 how to customise the Favourites, 190 how to customize favourites, 126 how to define the engineer qualifications, 159

312401/B

how to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers, 160, 222 how to display alarm group information, 120, 184 how to display alarm history, 119, 183 how to display counters and reset counters, 121, 184 how to display offscan alarms, 121, 185 how to display system information, 145, 159, 200, 207, 221 how to handle alarm events, 115 how to lock and unlock the TCP, 180 how to make list of selected tags, 133, 196 how to override limitations to acknowledge alarms, 147, 210 how to override limitations to control pumps and valves, 147, 210 how to print Miscellaneous Logs, 127, 190 how to save screen dump, 125, 189 how to select the Watch Responsible location, 156, 218 how to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions, 122, 186 how to set the On Duty engineer, 155, 218 how to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer, 211 how to silence the CRP buzzer, 148 how to toggle between group and alarm display, 122, 186 Info field, 147, 210 Long trend display using CRP, 176 Long trend display using TCP, 238 Navigator image, 115

Operational procedures, MOS, 242 operational procedures, ShipViewer, 255 operational procedures, Watch calling system, 252 overview, 114 screen saver, 188 screen Saver, 124 Short trend display using CRP, 162 Short trend display using TCP, 224 system functions, 30 using the CRP, 115 using the TCP, 180 where to find Event Log display, 137 where to find the Event Log display, 200 Alarm detection, 27 Alarm sub-menu items, 402 Alarms, 27 display pages, 29 groups, 27 indication, 28 inhibit, 28 types, 27 ALC background light, 98 buttons and lamps, 97 buzzer, 98 panel layout, 97 temperature sensor, 99 Analogue input tag items, 389 Analogue output tags, 388

B Bar graphs, 77 Basic tag types, 386 Bearing Monitoring, 34 Bearing Wear ME monitoring, 263 Bearing Wear Monitoring, 35 Bearing Wear monitoring mimic ME monitoring, 264 BIST, 410 Boiler control, 44 Bridge watch alarms, 40 Bridge Watch Monitoring System How to adjust system timers, 279 How to call for backup, 279 How to change access level, 281

415


How to change between day and night viewing, 280 How to select backup navigator on duty, 278 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration, 280 How to turn system Auto-mode on/off, 278 How to turn the system on/off, 277 Normal use, 276 Operational procedures, 276 overview, 276 system functions, 40 Building blocks, 22 Built In Self-Test (BIST), 410

C Centralized operation, 25 Common sub-menu items, 401 Common sub-menu parameters, 401 Compressor control, 43 Control Room Panel (CRP) description, 53 Corrective maintenance, 409 Counter input measured values, 394 Counter input parameters, 393 Counter input tag items, 393 Counters, 31 CRP buttons and lamps, 91 buzzer, 94 display layout, 105 panel layout, 91 temperature sensor, 94 trackball, 94 Cylinder Liner ME monitoring, 271 Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic ME monitoring, 272 Cylinder Liner Temperature, 37

Distributed Processing Units main characteristics, 63 DPU Digital Governor Unit (DGU), 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS), 72 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc), 64 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8), 66 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a), 65 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16), 66 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) description, 75 Dynamic alarm limits ME monitoring, 266 Dynamic dead band, 391

E Earthing, 24 Enable alarms and events, 390 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring, 30 Engine monitoring, 34 Engine overview mimic ME monitoring, 263 Engineer’s safety functions, 403 local control, 403 OS control, 403 parameters, 403 Exhaust deviation parameters, 400 Exhaust deviation tag items, 400 Exhaust mean value parameters, 397 Exhaust mean value tag items, 397 Explanation of displays ShipViewer, 257

D Decentralized system architecture, 23 Descriptions units, 50 Design principles, 22 Diagnostics, 78 Digital input parameters, 396 Digital input tag items, 396 Display layout, 79

416

F Filter time, 390 Fuel performance system, 30

G Gateways, 74 Generator control, 46

Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) description, 70 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) description, 69 Getting started, 90 Using the ALC, 97 using the CRP, 91 Using the INP, 100 using the MOS, 103 Using the TCP, 95 Gradient parameters, 390

H Hard copy, 78 How alarms are printed after a black-out CRP, 116–117 TCP, 182 How to accept watch responsibility Watch calling system, 253 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration CRP, 155 TCP, 218 How to acknowledge alarms CRP, 116 How to adjust system timers BWMS, 279 How to call for backup BWMS, 279 How to call officers CRP, 157 TCP, 219 How to call the ON DUTY engineer Watch calling system, 252 How to change access level BWMS, 281 How to change alarm delay MOS, 251 How to change alarm limits MOS, 251 How to change between day and night viewing BWMS, 280 How to change Deviation parameters CRP, 152 TCP, 215 How to change list of tags in Selected Points group CRP, 134

312401/B

Index

TCP, 197 How to change system time CRP, 146 TCP, 209 How to change tag parameters MOS, 247 How to change tag parameters for a channel CRP, 148 TCP, 211 How to change time zone CRP, 145 TCP, 208 How to configure Event Log CRP, 132 How to configure the Autolog CRP, 135 TCP, 199 How to configure the Event Log TCP, 195 How to configure the Noonlog CRP, 136 TCP, 199 How to customise the Favourites TCP, 190 How to customize favourites CRP, 126 How to define the engineer qualifications CRP, 159 TCP, 221 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers CRP, 160 TCP, 222 How to display alarm group information CRP, 120 MOS, 243 TCP, 184 How to display alarm history CRP, 119 MOS, 242 TCP, 183 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode Watch calling system, 253

312401/B

How to display alarm summary MOS, 243 How to display counters and reset counters CRP, 121 TCP, 184 How to display information about DPUs MOS, 246 How to display mimic pictures MOS, 317 How to display offscan alarms CRP, 121 TCP, 185 How to display system information CRP, 137, 145, 159 TCP, 200, 207, 221 How to handle alarm events CRP, 115 MOS, 242 How to lock and unlock the TCP, 180 How to make list of selected tags CRP, 133 TCP, 196 How to open or close valves OS, 309 How to operate a compressor MOS, 330 OS, 299 How to operate a fan starter MOS, 327 OS, 295 How to operate a PID controller MOS, 344 OS, 313 How to operate a pump starter MOS, 317 OS, 283 How to operate valves MOS, 340 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms CRP, 147 TCP, 210 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves

CRP, 147 TCP, 210 How to print displayed information ShipViewer, 260 How to print Miscellaneous Logs CRP, 127 TCP, 190 How to receive a call Watch calling system, 252 How to respond to alarms Watch calling system, 252 How to save screen dump CRP, 125 TCP, 189 How to save ShipViewer images, 261 How to select backup navigator on duty BWMS, 278 How to select the Watch Responsible location CRP, 156 TCP, 218 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions CRP, 122 TCP, 186 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration BWMS, 280 How to set the On Duty engineer CRP, 155 TCP, 218 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer TCP, 211 How to silence the CRP buzzer CRP, 148 How to toggle between group and alarm display CRP, 122 TCP, 186 How to transfer watch responsibility Watch calling system, 252 How to turn system Auto-mode on/off BWMS, 278 How to turn the system on/off BWMS, 277 How to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters ME monitoring, 266

417


How to use fluctuate monitoring parameters ME monitoring, 273 How to view saved mimic diagram files ShipViewer, 261

I Image types, 79 Indicators Fuse failure, 413 Power, 412 Status, 414 Info field CRP, 147 TCP, 210 Inhibit parameters, 402 INP background light, 102 buttons and lamps, 100 panel layout, 100 temperature sensor, 102 trackball, 101 Input Panel (INP) description, 54 Introduction, 15

K Keyboard and screen configuration MOS, 244

L List image, 80 Logging, 78 Long trend display using CRP, 176 Long trend display using TCP, 238 Long Trend Logging ME monitoring, 269

M Main Bearing temperature, 37 Main functions ShipViewer, 255 Maintenance, 405 BIST, 410 corrective, 409 preventive, 406 Preventive 6–monthly, 407 Maintenance Plan, 406

418

schedule, 406 yearly, 408 weekly, 406 ME monitoring Bearing Wear, 263 Bearing Wear monitoring mimic, 264 Cylinder Liner, 271 Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic , 272 Dynamic alarm limits, 266 Engine overview mimic, 263 how to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters, 266 how to use fluctuate monitoring parameters , 273 Long Trend Logging, 269 operational procedures, ME monitoring, 263 overview mimic, 263 Sensor System Failure, 268 Short Trend Alarm Logging, 270 System overview mimic, 265 Measured values, 391 MetaPower torque monitoring, 39 Midi Operator Station description, 52 Monitoring image, 83 MOS about password access, 245 how to change alarm delay, 251 how to change alarm limits, 251 how to change tag parameters, 247 how to display alarm group information, 243 how to display alarm history, 242 how to display alarm summary, 243 how to display information about DPUs, 246 how to handle alarm events, 242 keyboard and screen configuration, 244 keyboard layout, 103 menus, 106 Multiple Serial Interface (MSI 12)

description, 71

N Navigator, 86 Navigator image CRP, 115 Normal use of the BWMS, 276

O Operational procedures AMS, MOS, 242 AMS, ShipViewer, 255 AMS, Watch calling system, 252 BWMS, 276 PCS, MOS, 316 PCS, OS, 283 PMS, MOS, 366 PMS, OS, 348 Operator functions, 77 Operator maintenance, 405 Operator Panels descriptions, 51 getting started, 90 Operator Station description, 51 Operator Stations descriptions, 51 getting started, 90 Overview mimic ME monitoring, 263

P PDF viewer, 85 PID controllers, 43 Power Management System operate bus-tie breaker, 382 operate generator set with start/stop control, 370 operate generator set without start/stop control, 379 operate generator set without start/stop control, with adjustable set-point, 381 operate main switchboard controller , 367 operational procedures, MOS, 366 Operational procedures, OS, 348 overview, 347

312401/B

Index

system functions, 45 user inter face, 366 Preventive maintenance, 406 Process Control System How to display mimic pictures, 317 How to open or close valves, 309 How to operate a compressor, 299, 330 How to operate a fan starter, 295, 327 How to operate a PID controller, 313, 344 How to operate a pump starter, 283, 317 How to operate valves, 340 Operational procedures, MOS, 316 Operational procedures, OS, 283 overview, 283 system functions, 41 Process image, 80 Process mimics, 77 Purifier control, 43 Purpose, this manual, 15

R Reference guide, 385 alarm and monitoring parameters, 389 engineer’s safety, 403 tag types, 386 Relays, 388 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16) description, 64 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) description, 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) description, 68 RIO, 69 RIO-C3 7–segment display troubleshooting, 411 Rules safety, 17 Running hours, 31

S Safety general rules, 17 Scaling parameters, 391 Screen saver TCP, 188

312401/B

Screen Saver CRP, 124 Scuffing, 38 Self-checking, 78 Sensor System Failure ME monitoring, 268 Sentry, 36 Shaft generator, 47 Ship Viewer, 89 ShipViewer Explanation of displays, 257 how to print displayed information, 260 how to save ShipViewer images, 261 how to view saved mimic diagram files, 261 main functions , 255 understanding the ShipViewer display, 255 Short Trend Alarm Logging ME monitoring, 270 Short trend display using CRP, 162 Short trend display using TCP, 224 Stand-by pumps, 41 Status displays, 77 System architecture, 23 System components, 22 System configuration image, 84 System description architecture, 23 building blocks, 22 design principles, 22 DPUs, 63 gateways, 74 operation, 25 system overview, 18 Watch Calling, 58 System diagrams, 20 System Gateway (SGW), 74 System images display and control, 87 display layout, 79 image layout, 79 list image, 80 monitoring image, 83 Navigator, 86 PDF viewer, 85 process image, 80 Ship Viewer, 89 system configuration image, 84 trend image, 82

System interfaces, 19 System overview, 18 System overview mimic ME monitoring, 265

T Tank display, 32 TCP Alarm Navigator, 95 Graphic Display Navigator, 96 panel layout, 95 Touch Control Panel (TCP) description, 56 Trend image, 82 Trend monitoring, 30 Troubleshooting DPU communication errors, 412 DPU error codes, 410 RIO-C3, 411

U Understanding the ShipViewer display, 255 Unit descriptions, 50 User interface, 77 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC), 97 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP), 91 Using the Input Panel (INP), 100 Using the Midi Operator Station (MOS), 103 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP), 95

V Valve control, 42 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) description, 73

W Watch Bridge Unit using the WBU, 107 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) description, 59 Watch Cabin Unit using the WCU, 110 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) description, 60 Watch calling system

419


how to accept watch responsibility, 253 how to call the ON DUTY engineer, 252 how to display alarm information when in off duty mode, 253 how to receive a call, 252 how to respond to alarms, 252 how to transfer watch responsibility, 252 Watch Calling system, 58 Water in oil detection, 38 WBU adjust illumination, 109 panel layout, LCD, 108 panel layout, LED, 109 test panel, 110 WCU adjust illumination, 113 panel layout, LCD, 111 panel layout, LED, 112 respond to alarms, 112 test panel, 113 Weekly maintenance, 406 Where to find Event Log display CRP, 137 Where to find the Event Log display TCP, 200 Wireless temperature monitoring, 36

420

312401/B

Index

312401/B

421

©2008

Kongsberg Maritime

Kongsberg Maritime AS Bekkajordet P.O.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, Norway

Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.kongsberg.com

312401b K Chief 500 Operator Manual AMS PCS PMS

Recommend Documents